Keysight Nemo Outdoor

User Guide
Notices
Copyright Notice
© Keysight Technologies, Inc. 2018
No part of this manual may be reproduced
in any form or by any means (including
electronic storage and retrieval or
translation into a foreign language)
without prior agreement and written
consent from Keysight Technologies, as
governed by United States and
international copyright laws.
Manual Part Number
NTA00000A-90008
Edition
Edition 1, December 2018
Documents Software Version 8.40
Published by:
Keysight Technologies Finland, Ltd.
Elektroniikkatie 10
90590 Oulu
Technology Licenses
The hardware and/or software described
in this document are furnished under a
license and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of such license.
Declaration of Conformity
Declarations of Conformity for this product
and for other Keysight products may be
downloaded from the Web. Go to
http://www.keysight.com/go/confo
rmity
and click on “Declarations of Conformity.”
You can then search by product number to
find the latest Declaration of Conformity.
U.S.Government Rights
The Software is “commercial computer
software,” as defined by Federal
Acquisition Regulation (“FAR”) 2.101.
Pursuant to FAR 12.212 and 27.405-3
and Department of Defense FAR
Supplement (“DFARS”) 227.7202, the
U.S. government acquires commercial
computer software under the same
terms by which the software is
customarily provided to the public.
Accordingly, Keysight provides the
Software to U.S. government customers
under its standard commercial license,
which is embodied in its End User
License Agreement (EULA), a copy of
which can be found at
http://www.keysight.com/find/
sweula. The license set forth in the
EULA represents the exclusive authority
by which the U.S. government may use,
modify, distribute, or disclose the
Software. The EULA and the license set
forth therein, does not require or
permit, among other things, that
Keysight: (1) Furnish technical
information related to commercial
computer software or commercial
computer software documentation that
is not customarily provided to the
public; or (2) Relinquish to, or otherwise
provide, the government rights in
excess of these rights customarily
provided to the public to use, modify,
reproduce, release, perform, display, or
disclose commercial computer software
or commercial computer software
documentation. No additional
government requirements beyond those
set forth in the EULA shall apply, except
to the extent that those terms, rights, or
licenses are explicitly required from all
providers of commercial computer
software pursuant to the FAR and the
DFARS and are set forth specifically in
writing elsewhere in the EULA. Keysight
shall be under no obligation to update,
revise or otherwise modify the
Software. With respect to any technical
data as defined by FAR 2.101,
pursuant to FAR 12.211 and 27.404.2
and DFARS 227.7102, the U.S.
government acquires no greater than
Limited Rights as defined in FAR 27.401
or DFAR 227.7103-5 (c), as applicable
in any technical data.
2
Warranty
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND IS
SUBJECT TO BEING CHANGED,
WITHOUT NOTICE, IN FUTURE EDITIONS.
FURTHER, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
KEYSIGHT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE
FURNISHING, USE, OR PERFORMANCE
OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.
SHOULD KEYSIGHT AND THE USER
HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN
AGREEMENT WITH WARRANTY TERMS
COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS
DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH
THESE TERMS, THE WARRANTY TERMS
IN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL
CONTROL.
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
damage to the product or loss of
important data. Do not proceed beyond a
CAUTION notice until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
personal injury or death. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING notice until the
indicated conditions are fully understood
and met.
Is the software of your measurement products up-to-date?
Keysight will periodically release software updates to fix known defects and incorporate product
enhancements. To search for software updates for your product, go to the Keysight Software
Manager website at:
www.keysight.com/find/softwaremanager

3
 Table of Contents

1 Quick Guide........................................................................................................................................... 10
1.1 Setting up the system....................................................................................................... 10
1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor ........................................................................................................ 11
1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options ................................................. 11
2 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................. 13
2.1 Licensing ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.1 Technical support expiration .................................................................................. 13
2.2 Important ........................................................................................................................... 14
2.2.1 Local laws and regulations ..................................................................................... 15
2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings ............................................................................... 15
2.2.3 Traffic safety ........................................................................................................... 16
2.2.4 Operating environment ........................................................................................... 17
3 Nemo Outdoor System Overview ................................................................................................... 18
3.1 Voice testing ..................................................................................................................... 18
3.2 Circuit-switched data testing........................................................................................... 18
3.3 Packet-switched data testing .......................................................................................... 18
3.4 Nemo Media Router .......................................................................................................... 18
3.4.1 Installing Nemo Media Router ................................................................................ 19
3.4.2 Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license ............................................... 22
3.4.3 Low data throughput with Nemo Media Router application ................................. 23
3.4.4 TeamViewer QuickSupport ..................................................................................... 24
3.4.5 Local Nemo Media Router Software Updates ........................................................ 26
3.4.6 NMR IMS video call quality option license............................................................. 27
3.5 Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite .................................................................................................. 27
3.6 Nemo Invex II..................................................................................................................... 28
3.7 Indoor measurements ....................................................................................................... 29
4 Installing Nemo Outdoor System ................................................................................................... 30
4.1 Hardware and software requirements ............................................................................. 30
4.2 Other hardware requirements .......................................................................................... 30
4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation ................................................................................ 31
4.4 Over-the-air SW updates ................................................................................................. 31
4.5 Nemo Outdoor device set-up ........................................................................................... 32
4.5.1 Connecting a GPS receiver ..................................................................................... 32
4.5.2 Connecting a scanner ............................................................................................. 32
4.5.3 Connecting voice quality devices ........................................................................... 32
4.6 Nemo Invex device set-up ................................................................................................ 32
4.6.1 Nemo Invex Status view ......................................................................................... 36

4
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4.6.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server ....................................... 40

4.7 General guidelines for drive testing ................................................................................. 40
5 Configuration Settings ...................................................................................................................... 42
5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor .............................................................................................. 42
5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page ................................................................... 42
5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog ..................................... 45
5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually .................................................................... 47
5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup ................... 48
5.2 Configuring test mobiles .................................................................................................. 48
5.3 Configuration Manager ..................................................................................................... 49
5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information ...................................................... 49
5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface ................................................................ 50
5.3.3 Configuration Manager - Notifications................................................................... 60
5.3.4 Configuration Manager - Scripts ............................................................................ 63
5.3.5 Configuration Manager - Device configurations .................................................... 64
5.3.6 Configuration Manager - Devices........................................................................... 64
5.3.7 Configuration Manager - View groups ................................................................... 70
5.3.8 Configuration Manager - Workspaces ................................................................... 71
5.4 Measurement Properties dialog ....................................................................................... 72
5.4.1 Measurement Properties – General ....................................................................... 72
5.4.2 Measurement Properties – Measurement .............................................................. 73
5.4.3 Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles ............................. 78
5.4.4 Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles ....................................... 81
5.4.5 Measurement Properties – Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning with
scanners 82
5.4.6 Measurement Properties - Script ........................................................................... 82
6 During Measurements ....................................................................................................................... 84
6.1 Textual notes ..................................................................................................................... 85
6.2 Nemo Cloud....................................................................................................................... 85
6.2.1 Changing the priority order of network interfaces................................................. 88
6.2.2 Work orders ............................................................................................................ 90
6.3 Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/ Invex ............................ 91
6.3.1 Nemo Commander server options.......................................................................... 92
6.3.2 Initial field unit configuration ................................................................................. 93
6.3.3 Measurement workflow .......................................................................................... 93
6.3.4 Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander................ 94
6.4 Making scanning measurements ..................................................................................... 94
6.5 Making voice calls............................................................................................................. 94
6.5.1 Voice Call Settings .................................................................................................. 96
6.5.2 End-to-end call instructions................................................................................... 98

5
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.5.3 Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing ................................................................................... 105

6.6 Voice quality measurements .......................................................................................... 109
6.6.1 Video Quality Monitoring ...................................................................................... 109
6.7 Making video calls .......................................................................................................... 110
6.8 Data transfers.................................................................................................................. 112
6.8.1 Configuring the data connection .......................................................................... 113
6.8.2 Configuring the FTP protocol ............................................................................... 118
6.8.3 Configuring the SFTP protocol ............................................................................. 121
6.8.4 Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol ........................................................................ 123
6.8.5 Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol .......................................................... 125
6.8.6 Configuring the POP3 protocol ............................................................................ 127
6.8.7 Configuring the SMTP protocol ............................................................................ 129
6.8.8 Configuring the IMAP protocol ............................................................................. 132
6.8.9 Configuring the streaming protocol ..................................................................... 133
6.8.10 Configuring the trace route protocol ................................................................... 135
6.8.11 Making data transfers ........................................................................................... 136
6.9 Streaming video quality testing ..................................................................................... 136
6.9.1 NMR PEVQ-S license ............................................................................................ 137
6.9.2 PEVQ-S Properties dialog ..................................................................................... 138
6.10 Application testing .......................................................................................................... 138
6.10.1 Screencasting and touchscreen simulation ......................................................... 138
6.10.2 Facebook testing................................................................................................... 143
6.10.3 Twitter testing ....................................................................................................... 145
6.10.4 WhatsApp testing ................................................................................................. 149
6.10.5 BiP testing ............................................................................................................. 162
6.10.6 Viber testing .......................................................................................................... 170
6.10.7 Instagram testing .................................................................................................. 179
6.10.8 Netflix testing ........................................................................................................ 181
6.10.9 Dropbox testing .................................................................................................... 182
6.11 SMS testing ..................................................................................................................... 185
6.12 MMS testing .................................................................................................................... 186
6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS ......................................................................... 186
6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog ................................................................................................ 188
6.12.3 Making MMS measurements ................................................................................ 188
6.13 USSD testing ................................................................................................................... 189
6.14 Start external application ............................................................................................... 190
6.15 ICMP Ping ........................................................................................................................ 191
6.16 Indoor mode .................................................................................................................... 193
6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps ............................................................................................ 193
6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files ....................................................................................... 196

6
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans ............................................................................. 198

6.16.4 Indoor route planning ........................................................................................... 198
6.16.5 iBwave maps ......................................................................................................... 200
6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis........................................................................................... 203
6.16.7 RF ingress analysis ............................................................................................... 205
6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu ...................................................................................... 207
6.17 Measurement and scanning profiles.............................................................................. 213
6.17.1 Measurement profiles ........................................................................................... 213
6.17.2 Scanning profiles .................................................................................................. 216
6.18 IP packet capturing ......................................................................................................... 217
6.19 Making script files ........................................................................................................... 219
6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands ............................................................................ 220
6.19.2 Receive call ........................................................................................................... 222
6.19.3 Wait settings ......................................................................................................... 224
6.19.4 Advanced script settings ...................................................................................... 228
6.19.5 Running scripts ..................................................................................................... 232
6.20 Call sequences ................................................................................................................ 233
6.20.1 Running call sequences ........................................................................................ 235
6.21 Measurement lists .......................................................................................................... 237
6.21.1 Measurement areas .............................................................................................. 239
6.22 Forcing functions ............................................................................................................ 242
6.22.1 Channel locking .................................................................................................... 243
6.22.2 Band locking ......................................................................................................... 245
6.22.3 Network selection ................................................................................................. 246
6.22.4 Carrier aggregation forcing .................................................................................. 247
6.22.5 Handover control .................................................................................................. 248
6.22.6 Cell barring............................................................................................................ 253
6.22.7 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode)............................................................ 253
6.22.8 AMR codec forcing ............................................................................................... 253
6.22.9 Qualcomm NV item read and write ...................................................................... 254
6.22.10 eDRX and PSM setting configuration with LTE-M and NB-IoT devices .......... 255
6.23 Cell testing ...................................................................................................................... 256
6.24 RF validation.................................................................................................................... 257
6.24.1 RF test ................................................................................................................... 258
6.24.2 Scanner and UE level check ................................................................................. 261
6.24.3 Scanner configuration check ................................................................................ 262
6.25 Missing neighbor detection ............................................................................................ 262
6.25.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile ........................................................... 262
6.25.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile ....................... 264
6.26 Pilot pollution analysis .................................................................................................... 265

7
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.26.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone .................................................. 266

6.26.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements ........................ 268
6.26.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones ........................................ 268
6.26.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners................................................. 269
6.27 GSM interference analysis.............................................................................................. 269
6.28 Band scan ........................................................................................................................ 271
6.29 Timeslot testing .............................................................................................................. 273
6.30 Viewing graphs ............................................................................................................... 275
6.30.1 Graph popup menu ............................................................................................... 276
6.30.2 Zoom - Scatter graph ........................................................................................... 279
6.30.3 Graph side panel – Layers .................................................................................... 280
6.30.4 Graph side panel – Values and parameter ........................................................... 286
6.30.5 Graph layer color configuration............................................................................ 286
6.30.6 Gauge graphs ........................................................................................................ 292
6.30.7 Spectrum graphs .................................................................................................. 293
6.30.8 Color grid graphs .................................................................................................. 295
6.30.9 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph .................................................... 296
6.30.10 Cell filtering in line and bar graph .................................................................... 297
6.31 Viewing grids ................................................................................................................... 297
6.31.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message ............................... 298
6.31.2 Grid popup menu .................................................................................................. 299
6.32 Viewing maps .................................................................................................................. 312
6.32.1 Base stations on a map......................................................................................... 314
6.32.2 MapXtreme maps.................................................................................................. 318
6.32.3 Route plans ........................................................................................................... 320
6.32.4 Navigation Assistant ............................................................................................. 322
6.32.5 Map popup menu .................................................................................................. 330
6.32.6 Color Set Editor..................................................................................................... 344
6.33 Export/import settings.................................................................................................... 346
6.33.1 Export settings to file ............................................................................................ 347
6.33.2 Export settings to FTP server................................................................................ 347
6.33.3 Import settings from file ....................................................................................... 348
6.33.4 Import settings from FTP server ........................................................................... 348
6.33.5 Export/Import configuration files ......................................................................... 348
7 Ending Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 350
7.1 Measurement report ....................................................................................................... 351
8 Measurement Results ...................................................................................................................... 353
8.1 Analyzing measurement results ..................................................................................... 353
8.2 Playing back measurement files .................................................................................... 353
8.2.1 Viewing and moving markers ............................................................................... 354

8
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.2.2 Closing playback files ........................................................................................... 355

8.3 Uploading measurement files to server......................................................................... 356
8.3.1 FTP send options .................................................................................................. 357
8.3.2 HTTPS send options.............................................................................................. 358
8.3.3 Nemo Xynergy send options................................................................................. 359
8.3.4 Dropbox send options ........................................................................................... 361
8.3.5 Nemo Cloud send options .................................................................................... 362
8.4 Exporting measurements................................................................................................ 363
9 User Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 367
9.1 View groups..................................................................................................................... 368
9.2 Status bar ........................................................................................................................ 369
9.3 Parameters view.............................................................................................................. 369
9.4 Customizing the ribbon and quick access toolbar ........................................................ 370
9.5 Nemo Outdoor windows ................................................................................................. 371
9.5.1 Custom windows................................................................................................... 371
9.5.2 Devices view ......................................................................................................... 372
9.5.3 Device Status view................................................................................................ 373
9.5.4 Output window ..................................................................................................... 374
9.5.5 Script Status window............................................................................................ 375
10 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 376
10.1 Low throughput............................................................................................................... 376
10.1.1 All Windows versions ............................................................................................ 376
10.2 Cannot add devices ........................................................................................................ 379
10.3 Required license option missing .................................................................................... 379
10.4 Cannot make calls/packet transfers .............................................................................. 379
10.5 Measurement file checksum notification ...................................................................... 379
10.6 Number of USB devices exceeded ................................................................................. 380
11 Shortcut Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 381
12 Notification Icons .............................................................................................................................. 382
13 Appendix 1 - Making MapInfo® raster maps ............................................................................ 383
13.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo® SW ................................................................ 383
14 Appendix 2 - CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor ....................................... 385
15 Technical Support ............................................................................................................................. 389
15.1 Nemo Support Portal ...................................................................................................... 389
15.2 Phone and email support ............................................................................................... 389
15.3 Locations for Keysight Technologies ............................................................................. 390

9
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

1 Quick Guide
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and
how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed
explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.

1.1 Setting up the system

Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install
Nemo Outdoor without it.

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!

1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (see
Hardware and software requirements). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program
Nemo Outdoor.exe. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same
setup.
2. When the installation is finished, restart the computer.
3. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computer’s
USB ports.
4. If you are making data measurements, you need to configure the measurement devices
and install drivers. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide provided in
the Nemo Outdoor package.
5. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously
viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device
Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in
online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking
the Go offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection
functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices
connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM ports
to them.
6. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a
Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see Configuration
through Load Device Configuration dialog).
7. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a
premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the
device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If
you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting
and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click
the Work Offline button. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline
mode and activate the device later. When you want to activate the devices, connect the
devices to the measurement system and click the Go Online button in the Nemo
Outdoor toolbar.
8. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load
Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open
Measurement File, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a

10
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

saved device configuration in File | Open Hardware Configuration and start a

measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add
New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also do this
from the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can also use the
Autodetect functionality by clicking the Autodetect button in the main view, which
automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports.
9. To add measurement devices manually, click the Add button in the main view. Select
the device type (phone, scanner, GPS) that you want to add and select the device model
from the list. Click Next. In the Device Configuration dialog, select the correct COM
ports and click OK.
10. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Copy all the required map files
to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\Maps. To define the default map file
and map folder, select Settings | User Interface Properties | Paths. In the Maps field,
select the folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the default
map file (see User Interface Properties – Paths).
11. If you have base station files (.nbf or .csv), copy them to the BTS files folder, for
example, C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files.

1.2 Using Nemo Outdoor

When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly and
is ready for measurements.
1. First, open some measurement windows through the Data Windows tab for monitoring
the measurement. Alternatively, you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that
contains some predefined views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.).
2. You can use Scripts (see Configuration Manager - Scripts) to generate a sequence of
actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. Click the
Device script settings button in the Devices view. Select an existing script in the Script
File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button.
3. If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the
Notifications function. Click the Device notification settings button
in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog.
4. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . Nemo Outdoor will start the
recording automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish
both the recording and the script, click the Stop button.
5. To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice
call or send MMS message, from the Measurement control menu.
6. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a
measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. You can
playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog.
Click Rename to change the file name.

1.2.1 Using Nemo Outdoor with command line options

Outdoor supports the following command line options. These command lines will enable the user
to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with
Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on
the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target field.
• /W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor
• /H <hw config> will directly open the given device configuration in Nemo Outdoor

11
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• /M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to
save any changes made to the device configuration or workspace
• /DEBUGBIN will start debug logging
For example, the command line below will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.worx workspace,
N95.hwcx device configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking
effect.
• Outdoor /W test.worx /H N95.hwcx /M SIMPLE

12
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

2 Before You Begin

This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement
Tool Software developed by Keysight Technologies, Inc.

Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of
digital networks. The supported network standards are:

cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz

CDMA2000
1xEVDO
AMPS
DVB-H
EGPRS
GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz
GPRS
HSDPA
HSUPA
HSPA+
LTE
TD-SCDMA
TETRA
iDEN
UMTS (FDD mode)
WiMAX

Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects
measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores
them on a hard disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization,
verification, and maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the
Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze.
Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of
supported devices, see the Nemo Outdoor technical overview and data sheets.

2.1 Licensing
Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo
Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.
A new license type and dongle HW was introduced with Nemo Outdoor 7.5.0. All fielded dongle
keys and licenses must be migrated to a new dongle when used with Nemo Outdoor version
7.5.0 or higher. Please contact Keysight Technologies Finland, nemo.support@keysight.com if
you still have an old dongle.

2.1.1 Technical support expiration

The USB dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor include a compulsory technical support and
maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date the
agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor
application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 7.50 with a 1-year
technical support maintenance agreement in April 2015. The customer is entitled for free

13
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

updates until April 2016. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2016 cannot be used with
the USB key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the
technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed, the key can be updated remotely and
the customer can update the application to the latest version.

2.2 Important
Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.
Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will
cause the terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!

The test devices (smartphones etc.) tested and sold by Keysight Nemo Wireless Network
Solutions are intended for testing purposes only. Software changes in devices may limit their
normal use. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions does its best to provide test devices
without any limitations but it is not always possible. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions
assumes no liability if any commercial application or feature is blocked or limited due to software
or other device-related modifications.

If the test device is moved to another country or used in the network of another operator than
initially ordered, it is possible that the device does not support all network features. Keysight
Nemo Wireless Network Solutions assumes no liability in any cases.

The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling
behind wireless technologies.
The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800,
TM6200, TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have
not been verified by Keysight. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Keysight
does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor
product description for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Keysight.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo
Outdoor system is running.
With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can
dial a wrong number.
With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be
activated.
In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct
levels. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document.
Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission
power of the mobile.
After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test
mobile into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo
Outdoor triggered events in the mobile.
Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the
Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computer’s USB port.
When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is
reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are
regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.

14
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

2.2.1 Local laws and regulations

Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other obligations
on the use of the Nemo Outdoor and/or the test devices. Observe the laws and regulations of the
country (as well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the Nemo Outdoor and/or test device
is used. Keysight assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with the
local laws and/or regulations.

2.2.2 Nemo Outdoor laptop settings

The laptops used for running Nemo Outdoor need to be set up before measurements. Below are
described the most important settings that may have an effect on the measurement results.
2.2.2.1 Power options
Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the
laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to
Control Panel | Hardware and Sound | Power Options. Select the High performance power plan.

2.2.2.2 Active protection system

If there is a system that detects acceleration in the laptop and causes the hard disk to stop when
jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise, there may be breaks in measurement data. In voice
quality testing there may be missing MOS scores, and with other test devices, gaps in the
measurement data.
With Lenovo laptops, select Control Panel | System and Security | Lenovo Active Protection. On
the Configuration page, deselect the Enable Active Protection System option.

15
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

2.2.2.3 USB hub properties

Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal Serial
Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Open the
Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to save
power option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.

2.2.3 Traffic safety

Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety
comes first.
Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time.
Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Keysight
assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation.
Always observe the local speed limits and traffic regulations when conducting drive testing.

16
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

2.2.4 Operating environment

Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the
devices used by Nemo Outdoor.
Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is
forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic
devices.
Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.
Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants,
or sites where blasting operations are in progress.

17
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3 Nemo Outdoor System Overview

3.1 Voice testing

The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user
provided or, optionally, provided by Keysight with all the software installed). The package also
includes the necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast
frequency scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.

3.2 Circuit-switched data testing

The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit
(Nemo Outdoor), an application server, and a data server. The data server is used to establish a
data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test
Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server
having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections
from test terminals. CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support circuit-
switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa.
If you are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive
mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit
can only receive files.
The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the
desired transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs
and error rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme
and number of timeslots.

3.3 Packet-switched data testing

The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit
and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a
Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve
multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. PS data testing is possible on all
cellular technologies that support packet-switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa.
If you are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads
(Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the
measurement unit can only receive files.
During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on
different network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of
timeslots.

3.4 Nemo Media Router

Nemo Media Router (NMR) is Keysight’s proprietary communications interface and application
developed for Android-based smartphones. With the NMR interface, smartphones communicate
with PC-based applications, such as, Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex, enabling voice quality

18
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

(PESQ/POLQA) measurements and data transfers on smartphones without any additional

hardware.
When performing voice quality measurements with NMR, the smartphone records the received
sample audio files and transfers audio files via the NMR interface to the test computer in real
time. The computer calculates the PESQ/POLQA MOS scores and the values are written in the
Nemo Outdoor log file. Eight phones can be connected to one CPU simultaneously.
Also data transfers can be made using Nemo Media Router installed on the smartphone. Please
check the Nemo Media Router data sheet for a list of supported devices and features.

NMR versions 1.0 and 1.1 are not supported with Nemo Outdoor version 7.3.0.x and
later. Customers using Nemo Media Router 1.0 or 1.1 should not update Nemo Outdoor
to the latest version before updating the Nemo Media Router application on the test
handsets. Nemo Media Router application and update instructions are available from
KSM.

NMR Voice Quality Testing Option can be fetched from NMR license server
automatically for all the currently fielded units by launching the Nemo Media Router
2.00 application on the phone after installation.

3.4.1 Installing Nemo Media Router

This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring Nemo Media Router. Handsets
ordered with Nemo Media Router come preinstalled from Keysight. If you wish to use your
existing Nemo Outdoor test terminals, please install the Nemo Media Router first. Please check
the Nemo Media Router data sheet for a list of supported devices.
Requirements:
• Nemo Handy firmware

19
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

1. First install the Nemo Media Router on the mobile (if not preinstalled by Keysight).
Connect the device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the NemoMediaRouter.apk
file on your device in the Nemo folder.
2. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the
NemoMediaRouter.apk file.

3. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.

20
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. After the Nemo Media Router application has started, restart the device.
5. When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex.
6. When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor/Invex, the Nemo Media Router
application is started automatically. If the Nemo Media Router does not appear, start
the application manually, reboot the device, and try again adding the device to Nemo
Outdoor.
7. The Outdoor option should be selected as the USB configuration from the bottom of the
view.

21
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8. In the Device Configuration – Port settings page, select Automatic in the Nemo Media
Router field and define the correct Trace and Modem ports. Click OK. The device is now
ready.

3.4.2 Updating the Nemo Media Router SW and license

After installation, existing Nemo Media Router users can fetch software updates and a license
over-the-air from the NMR license server by launching the Nemo Media Router application on
the phone.
In the License Browser view, select the correct license.

Confirm by selecting Load.

22
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

After the license has been loaded, the device needs to be restarted. Once the device restarts, you
can connect the device to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Media Router will start automatically.
To check for software updates, make sure that WiFi or mobile data (with HIM devices) is enabled,
press the button at the bottom of the NMR main view and select Check for updates.

3.4.3 Low data throughput with Nemo Media Router application

New Android based smart phones with Android version 6.0 have battery optimization enabled by
default. It will stop some CPU and network activity operating in the background for Android
apps, thus saving battery. It is activated when the handset is left idle for a period of time, while
unplugged and with the screen off. Battery saving mode interrupts background activity for
Android applications such as Nemo Media Router. E.g. with data transfers this is seen with

23
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

limited data throughput values. Battery saving option is disabled by default for the handsets
delivered by Keysight. However, if low data throughput occurs the following settings should be
checked and battery optimization should be disabled for all applications. Please note that
settings menu varies depending on handset vendor and model. Step by step instructions per
handset can be found from the device configuration guide.

1. Select phone's Settings.

2. Select battery from the device list and select Battery optimization from the menu icon at the
top-right of the screen.

3. Select all apps from the drop-down menu in the center of the display. You will see all the
apps that are Doze-enabled

4. Select Don’t optimize for all apps and then press Done.

3.4.4 TeamViewer QuickSupport

When handset isolation modules are used in Nemo Invex II, changing settings and updating the
NMR software can be done remotely with TeamViewer QuickSupport without opening the
housing. With TeamViewer it is possible to make a remote connection to the test handset via the
Nemo Outdoor user interface. Please note that one active connection at a time is supported, i.e.
connections to several handsets simultaneously are not possible. The laptop running Nemo
Outdoor must be connected to the internet, for example, by using a dedicated handset or a USB
modem connected to the controlling laptop. The test handset must be in service and support
data services. Packet data must be enabled.

The TeamViewer Quick Support (QS) application and TeamViewer Remote Control add-on
module are preinstalled to all test handsets delivered by Keysight with the Nemo Invex handset
isolation modules. TeamViewer must be installed also to the PC running Nemo Outdoor.
Please note that TeamViewer can be used free of charge only with non-commercial use.
Customers using the UI monitoring and controlling with the TeamViewer tools for
commercial use must obtain the licenses directly from TeamViewer
(www.teamviewer.com).

24
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To control the NMR device from Nemo Outdoor, right-click the device in the Devices view and
select Open Remote Connection.

25
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Nemo Outdoor will connect to the device and open the TeamViewer window with a view of the
device screen. You can now control the device.

3.4.5 Local Nemo Media Router Software Updates

Local NMR application update provides convenient and easy way to update all NMR test
handsets at once via Nemo Outdoor user interface. Users can choose one or all NMR devices and
perform the update process. Users can browse to the NMR installation package from the Nemo
Outdoor user interface after which the files are transferred to the device and automatically
installed. Update process is possible only when devices are connected (on-line mode) and
recording in not active. Nemo Media Router application installation package is available from the
USB memory stick provided at the time of delivery. License updates can be also done via Nemo
Outdoor user interface. Please note that NMR local software and license update is supported
from NMR 7.9.0 version onwards. Updating from older version than 7.9.0 must be done using
NMR application on the test handset, e.g. using screen casting or TeamViewer.

You can update NMR software and license by right-clicking the device in the Devices view and
selecting Update NMR in the drop down menu.

Note that to use this functionality the NMR version must be compatible with Nemo
Outdoor version, otherwise the update will not go through. Once NMR has been
updated manually by copying the .apk file to your device’s Nemo file and installing the
software, updates can be done through Nemo Outdoor.

26
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3.4.6 NMR IMS video call quality option license

Separate license option and license file exists for NMR-based (VQMon) NMR IMS Video Call
Quality Option per test handset. License is always located in the test handset and it is not
transferable between test devices.
License file generated per device ID is in the memory card. File name is: host_id.txt and it is
located at: sdcard/Nemo/<product> where <product> is Handy, Walker Air or NMR.
Host_id.txt file need to be sent to Keysight customer support. License file in return with name:
vqmon_license.txt must be stored at: sdcard/Nemo/<product> where <product> is Handy,
Walker Air or NMR.

3.5 Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite

The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for
use with Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system
technologies and networks with support for up to eight test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a
sound card. In addition, the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the
use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and

27
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

data transfers simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the
test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

3.6 Nemo Invex II

Nemo Invex II is the most powerful and advanced benchmarking system for testing with large
wireless device configurations with high data rates and with rich suite of application testing
options. The system enables testing with up to 50 test UEs and with up to three scanners
simultaneously with lower power consumption per device, giving operators, network vendors,
regulators, and contractors the possibility to benchmark voice and data services on all available
wireless technologies in one test drive.
In the new Nemo Invex II design, the main focus has been on reliability in extreme conditions.
The design boasts sophisticated built-in cooling and heating and replaceable air filters. The
enhanced capacity of Nemo Invex II offers support for the largest number of test devices in the

28
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

world. Yet, power efficiency has not been overlooked: the power usage per UIC has been cut in
half thanks to the innovative design.
The system has improved UPS functions including backup for scanners as well as built-in
monitoring for power, temperature, and current maintaining the measurement system at optimal
temperature. Furthermore, USB charging 1.2 compliant ports enable the charging of the
measurement devices in long measurement sessions.
The one size chassis allows totally free mix and match modularity between the chassis via the
advanced Invex Chassis NET communication interface. Compared to current commercial
benchmarking systems, the need for manual cabling has been reduced dramatically. The system
is designed for easy installation and usage in cars with wireless connectivity to the control PC,
built-in ambient lights and KVM (keyboard, video, and mouse) for improved usability – even in
environments with less light.

3.7 Indoor measurements

Nemo Outdoor has an indoor mode measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be
installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively, a regular laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers
cannot be used indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just
click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. It is also
possible to use BTS files with floorplans. With Nemo Backpack, test equipment can be easily
taken inside buildings.

29
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4 Installing Nemo Outdoor System

This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices.
Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the
Nemo Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo
Outdoor files onto your computer.

Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges. Note that if the existing Nemo Outdoor version is 6.2.1.x
or older it must be uninstalled via add or remove programs before the Nemo Outdoor 7.x
installation can be run. During Sentinel HASP driver installation, you are prompted to
restart the computer. Press “Restart later” to continue with the Nemo Outdoor
installation.

4.1 Hardware and software requirements

• PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows 7 ® Professional (32/64 bit),
Windows® 8, and Windows® 10
• Processor Intel® Core™ i7 2.66GHz or higher
• SSD drive recommended
• 500 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 4 GB recommended
• One USB port for copy protection module
• One USB 3.0 port for test device
• Ethernet port RJ45
• Display resolution 1400 x 900 recommended
• Memory 4GB RAM minimum, 8GB recommended
• PDF reader for opening the user manual
• Depending on the scanner used, one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per
scanner
• One USB port for an external GPS receiver
• Internal 3G/ 4G modem recommended in case end to end call communication with
Nemo Server and Nemo Cloud is used

4.2 Other hardware requirements

The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning
receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette
lighter plug).
• External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted
• GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported)
o Garmin GPS II
o Garmin GPS II Plus
o Garmin GPS III/III+
o Garmin GPS 35
o Garmin V
o Garmin 18 USB
o Garmin 18x USB
o Rohde Schwarz TSMX-PPS2 DR
o Transsystem GM-3
o Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit

30
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

o Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output

Nemo Outdoor software is protected with a HASP USB key (see Licensing).

4.3 Nemo Outdoor software installation

To install or upgrade Nemo Outdoor:

If you have a previous version of Nemo Outdoor installed, please remove it before
installation. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Right-click
on Nemo Outdoor and select Uninstall.

Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.

1. Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor\Nemo Outdoor
x.xx.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When
the Installation program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. We recommend
that you select the Complete setup type.
2. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the
computer.

To uninstall Nemo Outdoor:

1. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Right-click on Nemo
Outdoor and select Uninstall.

Note that uninstallation must be run under Administrator account or other user account
with administrative privileges.

4.4 Over-the-air SW updates

Over-the-air (OTA) updates provide a convenient way to keep your Nemo Outdoor units up to
date and to manage the update process.

Click the Updates button in the Settings tab and select Check for Updates to check if there are
any software updates available for Nemo Outdoor, NMR, and Nemo Invex II. If there are updates
available, the setup files are downloaded on the Nemo Outdoor laptop, after which you run the
installation locally. The system first checks for Nemo Outdoor updates, next for NMR updates,
and last for Nemo Invex II updates (if you are running the SW with a Nemo Invex license). The
system checks for NMR and Nemo Invex updates that are compatible with the Nemo Outdoor
version.

Valid technical support and maintenance agreement is required. If technical support

and maintenance agreement has expired, the Updates button is not active.

31
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4.5 Nemo Outdoor device set-up

Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement
system. However, instructions for devices that require a data connection can be found in the
Device Configuration Guide.

4.5.1 Connecting a GPS receiver

1. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.
2. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.
3. Start Nemo Outdoor. Select Add | GPS.

4. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.
5. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program
automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection.
6. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.

4.5.2 Connecting a scanner

See the Nemo Scanner Guide and Nemo FSR1 User Manual documents for information on how
to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor.

4.5.3 Connecting voice quality devices

Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete installation and
configuration instructions.

4.6 Nemo Invex device set-up

After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the measurement
servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. Start Nemo
Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. Clicking Group Devices by button , and
selecting Group by Measurement Server displays a list of available measurement servers and
UICs. Click Refresh to find all measurement servers connected to the system.

32
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will change
to Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo
Outdoor. Finally, click Close.
The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to
devices connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click Autodetect to detect devices
connected to the measurement servers.

A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. Define whether the device
will be used for voice quality or data measurements. Read chapter Multiple data connections on
one measurement server for more information on having two active data connections on a single
measurement server.

33
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration
supported by the scanner.
Finally click Online. The Start Devices dialog opens. Here you can review the UIC and device
information. If you are happy with the configuration, click Online or Offline to add the devices to
Nemo Outdoor.

34
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can also restart and reboot the UICs, the OS, and the USB ports or individual UIC modules.
Right-click on the UIC and select the command from the context menu.

The Nemo FSR1 scanner needs to be added manually. Click the Add button in the Home tab,
select the Nemo FSR1 and select a UIC in the field at the bottom of the dialog.

35
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

It is possible to save the device configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As.
This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.
To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a
measurement server and click Disconnect.

4.6.1 Nemo Invex Status view

The Nemo Invex Status view displays information about the current Nemo Invex hardware
configuration. The image shows the actual configuration and relevant health information for the
selected module. If there are more than one chassis, the chassis are numbered and you can
arrange the view by dragging and dropping the chassis. The Nemo Invex Status view also
displays all possible hardware alerts and warnings, such as high/low voltage, high/low
temperature and battery shutdown. Warnings are highlighted in yellow and alerts in red. The
warning and alert threshold levels are user-configurable and you can also define an audio alert.
Right-click the Nemo Invex Status view and select Set Chassis Alert Thresholds.

36
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Nemo Invex Status view will be updated accordingly. In the example below, the chassis
number 1 is displaying a warning about high temperature.

The UIC and HIM module connections are color-coded. If you select a HIM module from the
image, the USB port where the HIM module is connected to will be highlighted with the same
color.

37
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can also reset individual USB ports by right-clicking the USB port in the image and selecting
the command from the context menu.

38
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

From the Nemo Invex Status view context menu you can Enable Debug Logging for individual
UICs. First run Nemo Outdoor in debug mode and then connect to the UIC to activate the
command.
Select Export HW Information to a Text File to save the Nemo Invex II hardware information
containing all chassis and module versions and HW health information in a text file. Note that the
UICs need to be connected in order to export the information.

The Nemo Invex Systems view displays detailed information about the UICs and the devices. You
can disconnect UICs and refresh the view. For HIM modules, the device information is shown.

39
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4.6.2 Multiple data connections on one measurement server

You can have multiple (with Nemo Invex II up to six) active data connections on a single
measurement server. For example, MMS can be tested with one test device while another device
is performing an FTP transfer. The data routing option is enabled by default with Nemo Invex
allowing more than one active data connection. However, when routing table modifications is
enabled, there are some limitations with data testing. For example, it is required that different
source IP addresses for data testing are used. This means that the host IP address or URL must
be different for each test device.
Routing table modification should be disabled when only one active data connection is required.
Select Settings | User Interface Properties | Measurement and set Enable routing table
modifications for devices to No.

If routing table modification is disabled when performing multi-data testing with one
measurement server, problems may be caused when several data connections are opened from
one host computer to the terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one
connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all data connections are routed via
one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This will distort the test results.

4.7 General guidelines for drive testing

Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no
slashes or cuts.
Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable
measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength.
Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically
as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two
wavelengths from each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.

40
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

λ=c/f
c = 300E6 (m/s)
f = frequency (Hz)

450 MHz, λ = 66 cm
900 MHz, λ = 33 cm
1800 MHz, λ = 17 cm
1900 MHz, λ = 16 cm
GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz, λ =
19 cm

Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

Band λ
450 66 cm (26”)
700 42 cm (18”)
850 35 cm (14”)
900 33 cm (13”)
1800 17 cm (7”)
1900 16 cm (6.3”)
2100 14 cm (5.5”)
2300 13 cm (5.1”)
2500 12 cm (4.7”)
2600 11 cm (4.3”)
GPS (1565- 1575) 19 cm (7.5”)

When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna
cables. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

Check the condition of all RF cables, and connectors: no tight curves, no slashes or cuts.

Check that RF connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable
measurements or wrong attenuation of signals. Use the SMA torque wrench to tighten
the connectors.

Minimum distance between antennas, at least one wavelength from the corners and roof
windows, and two wavelengths from each other.

Individual antennas may have different performance. Therefore use only one antenna
type with all test devices.

RF-splitters shall be used only for test UEs. If RF-splitters are used also with scanners,
separate RF-splitters must be used.

Main and MIMO RF cables of the same UE shall not be connected to the same RF-
splitter as it would disable the MIMO/diversity.

41
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5 Configuration Settings
After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your
environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following
instructions will help you in this initial configuration.

5.1 Configuring Nemo Outdoor

You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most
convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of Nemo
Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced users may
want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.

5.1.1 Configuration through Welcome page

1. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a
first-time user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears on
the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the
future when opening Nemo Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.

2. With the Autodetect functionality, you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor
without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality automatically
searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information.

Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a
USB cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the
drop-down menu.

42
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may
need to configure the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to the
Nemo Outdoor Device Configuration Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device
may also require additional configurations in its modem settings.

3. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking Start Devices, start them in offline
mode by clicking Go Offline, or refresh the device configuration by clicking Refresh on
the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you accidentally
unplug a device and plug it in again.
4. PIN code requests should be turned off for all devices but in case there is a pending PIN
code request for a test device, a dialog will be displayed where you can enter the PIN
code. After pressing OK, PIN code requesting will be disabled from the device.

5. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.

43
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations.
This includes the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If you would like
to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and a
workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration
file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

7. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without
connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device
configuration and click the Go Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices
manually and activate them. When you want to activate the devices, connect the
devices to the measurement system and click the Go Online button in the Nemo
Outdoor toolbar.

44
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement
with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a
workspace for the measurement. Click Load Selected Files.

5.1.2 Configuration through Load Device Configuration dialog

To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other… in the Open a Device Configuration
field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window.
1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a
workspace, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a
workspace. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.
2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a
pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Online. All the devices

45
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start
measurements.

3. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without
connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device
configuration and click the Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You
can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device.
When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system
and click the Go Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
4. In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click
Start Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.

5. Add a device by clicking the Add button in the Devices view. Choose the
appropriate phone, scanner, or GPS receiver from the list and click Next.
6. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor
application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly.
7. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values.
8. Click on Measurement Properties in the Device Configuration dialog to enter the
Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement
settings. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK.
9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (Alt+M) to open the
User Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that
affect all devices. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the
measurements.

46
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.1.3 Configuring Nemo Outdoor manually

If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and
select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File |
Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you
can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements.
In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a
previously added device and its assigned COM ports. Click the Autodetect Devices button in the
toolbar.
A dialog with a list of previously added devices appears. In the Label field you can type a name
for the device. Select the devices you want to add, define whether the device is in data mode or
voice quality mode, and click the Online or Offline button at the bottom of the dialog.

47
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.1.4 Use case 1. Start measurements automatically upon device startup

The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start
recording automatically when devices are connected and started.
In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations.
1. Go to View | User Interface Properties.
2. On the Measurement page, set the Start recording automatically when devices are
started and Start scripts automatically options to Yes. Click OK.

3. Save the workspace and device configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace
As, and File | Save Device Configuration As.
4. Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start
automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are
selected.

5.2 Configuring test mobiles

To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for data testing purposes, see the Device
Configuration Guide provided by Keysight.
PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the mobile
user manual to find these options from the mobile.

Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out
measurements.

48
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3 Configuration Manager

Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager.
You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking Settings the Configuration
Manager toolbar button .
The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Double-click an item on the list to edit
the item.

The System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor.

Under Measurement Servers are listed all Nemo Invex measurement servers connected to the
system. Select a server to view some hardware status information for the server.

5.3.1 Configuration Manager - Handler information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your
computer. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found in the Nemo Outdoor product
package. Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must
have the corresponding handler installed.

49
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.2 Configuration Manager - User interface

Under the User Interface item, you will find several items. Double-click on the User Interface
Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog (see the next chapters for more
information).
The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup.
Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see User Interface Properties –
Colors).
Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For
further information on how to create color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor.
You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the
Presentation modes item (see User Interface Properties – Presentation).
Operators and CDMA Operators displays a list of operator names along with the respective MCC
and MNC codes. To add new operators to the list, double-click the Operators or CDMA
Operators item in the Configuration Manage and click the Add button. Enter the Operator name,
MCC, and MNC. For CDMA operators, add the operator name and SID.

50
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

51
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.2.1 User Interface Properties – General

Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when
you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened
the next time you start the SW.
Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a
problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing.
Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the
Script Status window when script files are used in measurements.
Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in
audio quality measurements also during playback.
When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome
to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed.
Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit
the Full Screen mode through an UI button.
With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a dialog with a list of
the logged debug files is displayed when Nemo Outdoor is closed. Debug logging is activated by
running Nemo Outdoor in debug mode. When you run Nemo Outdoor in debug mode, the text
[DEBUG MODE] appears in the title bar.

52
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When the Include device number in audio notification option is selected, the device number is
included at the beginning of the notification audio alert.
With the Load workspace on startup option you can define which workspace is loaded when
Nemo Outdoor is started.
With the Load hardware configuration on startup option you can define which hardware
configuration is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started.
With the Start measurement list on startup option you can define which measurement list is
loaded and started when Nemo Outdoor is started.
When the Enable route history option is selected, a GPX (GPS Exchange Format) file is generated
from the measurement. A GPX file is also generated when loading playback files. GPX is a light-
weight XML data format for the interchange of GPS data (waypoints, routes, and tracks) between
applications and web services on the Internet.

5.3.2.2 User Interface Properties – Measurement

By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access
the Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings
affecting all measurements.

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-
day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the
items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1.
The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. You can
also create custom filename templates. See chapter Creating Filename Templates.

%a Abbreviated weekday name

%A Full weekday name

53
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

%b Abbreviated month name

%B Full month name
%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)
%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)
%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)
%n Sequence number (1 – )
%N Sequence number (1 – )
%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)
%Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown
%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry
settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the
script file when you click the Start button in the main window.
With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile
to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will
stay in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile
in active state when toggling a script on and off.

Please note that it is recommended that with LTE devices this option is set to No. If
attach/ detach commands are needed frequently, for example, with script files it is
suggested that radio off/radio on commands are used instead of attach/detach.

Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop
recording after the script is finished.
If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the
Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices
are finished before repeating the scripts.
Select the Prevent script stopping during connection establishment option to delay the script
stopping if any of the devices has a call or connection attempt ongoing.
With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of
the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time.
Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start
measuring only after there is a GPS fix.
Select the Enable automatic measurement pausing option to initiate an automatic pause when
GPS velocity goes under X km/h for X seconds or the GPS position is stale (ie. coordinates do not
change). Logging will be resumed automatically after the GPS velocity exceeds the user-
specified limit X.

54
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

GPS time offset value specifies the difference between GPS UTC time and local time. This offset
is used by handlers when GPS time synchronization is performed.
Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped
during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed.
Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from
the device when the device is started.
When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Nemo Outdoor uses
the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call.
Enable ETSI call timeout option changes the call attempt timeout to terminate at CAC 2 event.
By default, call attempt timeout terminates at CAC 1 event. See the Nemo File Format
specification (click ? in the top-right corner of the main view and select Nemo File Format) for
more information on the events.
With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and disable
routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification should
be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi data
testing, it can cause problems when several data connections are opened from one host
computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection
between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all connections are routed via one terminal, not
via different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.
Buffer size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The
size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement.
Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo
Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline
mode to online mode.
Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls
after the measurement is ended.
Selecting the Show send dialog before sending measurement to server option will display the
Send Measurement to Server dialog after the measurement is ended and before the log files are
sent to a server. See chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more information.
Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message
when the measurement has been paused.
With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a
dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording.
Selecting the Start recording when incoming call is received option enables Nemo Outdoor to
start recording automatically when a test call is received.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are
deleted.
• measurement files (.nmf)
• binary files (.nbl)
• packet capture files (.pcap)
• marker files (.mrk)
• indoor map files (.tab and image)
• BTS file (.nbf)
RF offset. In order to prevent measurements with missing/incorrect RF antenna connections,
Nemo Outdoor performs a check when measurement is started. The RXL/RSSI value of each
measured channel/carrier is read from each phone and scanner. The value from each channel is
compared to the highest value from all devices. If the measured value is less than X dB (=RF
offset value) below the highest value, a warning message is displayed to the user with the
channel number and the device name(s). In Remote mode, the offset value X can be set by Nemo
Commander. If a warning message is triggered by the field unit, it is shown in Nemo
Commander.

55
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Select the Include packet capture logs in measurement file upload option to send packet
capture logs during measurement file upload.
When the Enable scanner configuration monitor option is selected, Nemo Outdoor collects a list
of serving cell channels measured by test phones and compares it to a list of channels
configured for scanners connected to the system. If a measured channel is not configured for any
scanner, an error message is displayed.
When the Prevent script starting if E2E server connection test fails option is selected, Nemo
Outdoor verifies the connection to the E2E server before starting a script. If there is no
connection to the server, the script will not start.
When the Enable end to end calls when server connection fails option is enabled, the end-to-
end call control configuration allows the originate calls to be made from Nemo Server to a field
unit even if the “receive incoming call” command fails due to a lack of data connectivity between
the field unit and Nemo Server. This ensures that the number of MOC and MTC calls between the
handsets within the same script group are always same.
When the Group end to end call requests option is enabled, the script groups are used to group
the Nemo Server functions. Successful Nemo Server function request in one device triggers the
call action in all other devices of the same group.
When the Toggle terminal radio when phone is started option is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will
execute terminal radio off and terminal radio on commands whenever a phone is started.
Default loudspeaker mode defines whether the computer loudspeaker is muted or unmuted.

5.3.2.3 Creating filename templates

You can create templates for naming measurement log files. The template includes parameters
(tags) and a list of allowed values for each parameter. The template also specifies the filename
format which defines how the tags are used in the filename. The templates can be exported and
imported.
Click the Filename item on the User Interface Properties – Measurement page and select Create
new filename or Edit current filename to open the Filename Editor. Click the Add button to add a
custom parameter.

In the Parameter Editor dialog, type a name for the new parameter. Then click the New button
to add the possible values for the parameter. For example, add a parameter called city and

56
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

then add a list of cities where you conduct measurements. Finally click OK to return to the
Filename Editor.

The new parameter is listed in the Parameters table. You can add as many parameters as
needed. In the Filename field, define the filename format where you can now use your custom
parameters. For example, %City%m%d%Y. Below, in the Filename field you can see a preview of
what the filename will look like with the selected parameters.

The new filename template can now be selected on the User Interface Properties – Measurement
page in the Filename field.

When you start logging, you will be asked to select a value for the custom parameter. This value
will be used in the filename.

57
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.2.4 User Interface Properties – Paths

58
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the
default values. To change the default paths, click on the … button and browse for a new location.
In the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab
map file is provided by Keysight in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are
used in FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set
refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color
sets, see chapter Color Set Editor.
Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications in the Sounds field, select
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.

Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

5.3.2.5 User Interface Properties – Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are
presented. For example, to change the file size and buffer size unit in all data transfer
configuration dialogs, edit the Size setting in the User Interface Properties – Presentation dialog.

59
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.2.6 User Interface Properties – Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first
eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map
routes.
To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the
colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

5.3.3 Configuration Manager - Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo
Outdoor includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The
notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the
measurement file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or
display a .png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A
textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default.
By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes
to, for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

5.3.3.1 Notification Configuration

To make your own notifications, select Settings | Notification Manager.

60
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and
the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a
notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or
use the default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface
Properties – Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use. Use the Play button to listen to
the file. If you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create
the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female.
Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in
the field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you
want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in
the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Images.

61
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.

Title defines a name for the notification.

Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. You can
define a counter that specifies how many times the notification rules must match consecutively
before the notification is triggered.
Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Operator and
Value for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification.
You can add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved
and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the
notification.
Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain
events only once.
The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you
can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings button

in the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog. Select
the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.

62
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device.

To make user-configurable notifications:

1. Open the Notifications dialog (Settings | Notification Manager) and click Add.
2. In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.
3. In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound
and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the
notifications table.
4. Click OK to save the settings.

5.3.4 Configuration Manager - Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be
used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data
transfers. Select the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view.
Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script
file to be used in a measurement, click the Device script settings button in the Devices view.
Creating Script files is described in more detail in chapter Making script files.

63
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.5 Configuration Manager - Device configurations

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device
configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can
use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having
to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor.
You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can load
a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device
Configuration dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo
Outdoor and configure them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration
As and type a name for the saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration
Manager, Device Configurations folder.
To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager
and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.

5.3.6 Configuration Manager - Devices

Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon , and remove a device by selecting the
device and clicking on the minus icon . The table on the right displays information about the
selected device.
Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own configuration dialog. Double-clicking on the
device will open the applicable device configuration dialog. These dialogs are presented next.

64
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.6.1 Device configuration for mobiles and modems

The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and makes
it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in
the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is
also stored in the log file header.
Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Device
Configuration Guide for more detailed information.
Kodiak PTT port defines the COM port for a Kodiak PTT device. Please refer to chapter Kodiak
Push-to-Talk for more information.
Nemo Media Router option is used to enable Nemo Media Router. Select Automatic to enable
the option.
CS data connection option gives a list of all the circuit-switched data connections that have
been configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a
connection here. See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Keysight for detailed
instructions for configuring test devices.
PS data connection option gives a list of all the packet-switched data connections that have
been configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a
connection here. See the Device Configuration Guide provided by Keysight for detailed
instructions for configuring test devices.
When performing AT command-based data measurements with IoT devices, select Not
used as the PS data connection.

Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the
conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external
antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.

65
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Antenna Frequency Antenna Impedance VSWR 1 Max Polarization Cable Cable &
type range gain power loss connector
(dBd)

1140.27 824– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear - Mini Low

894/1710– specified vertical 0.55/ Loss 2.5
1880/ freq. -0.82 m, SMA
1850– dB/m male
2170 MHz
1140.26 890– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear Mini Low
960/1850– specified vertical Loss 2.5
1990/ freq. m, SMA
1710– male
2170 MHz

Product Code Antenna Model Frequency Band Antenna Gain Device

[dBi]
42101-06 MPLV1700 1700- 2700 MHz 4 dBi PCTEL
R&S
421010-04 PCTEL MLPV OP178H 698-2300 MHz PCTEL
R&S
421010-05 Mobile Mark Mag. 694-894 MHz 3 dBi Nemo FSR1
MGRM-WLF-1C10 & 1700- 2700 MHz

421010-07* Mobile Mark Mag. 750-1250 MHz 3 dBi on 750-1250 Nemo FSR1
MGRM-UMB-1C & 1650-2700 MHz MHz, 5 dBi on Test UEs
1650-2700 MHz

421010-08 PCTEL OP178H 698-3000 MHz 3 dBi PCTEL/

Nemo FSR1
Test UEs
421022-25 PCTEL OP278H 698-3800 MHz ~1 dBi on 900-2100 PCTEL/
MHz Nemo FSR1
0dBi on 2300 MHz Test UEs
~1dbi on 2600 MHz
~1.5dBi on 3500
MHz

66
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Keysight or Smarteq. If you
are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and
cable loss information from the manufacturer.

Voice quality algorithm defines which voice quality algorithms are used in voice quality
measurements.
If you select the Invex isolation module option, you can also make echo measurements. Select
the Enable echo measurement option to start logging the echo-related parameters. With the
Advanced echo OEM library provided by Opticom it is possible to measure echo from audio with
both PESQ and POLQA algorithms. Echo measurements require an additional license and it is
available with Nemo Invex using a handset isolation module. Echo measurements are not
supported with commercial sound cards, such as, Terratec DMX6 Fire or Maya44.
Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality
measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the
drop-down menu.
Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality
measurements. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.
Select the Invex isolation module option to use a terminal with a Nemo Invex isolation module for
voice quality measurements.
Select the Nemo Media Router option to use a terminal with Nemo Media Router for voice
quality measurements.
Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.
Video quality algorithm defines which algorithms are used in video streaming quality
measurements. For more information, see chapter Streaming video quality testing.
After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

67
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement
Properties dialog by clicking the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view.

5.3.6.2 Device configuration for scanners

In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. The
label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and
the information is also stored in the log file header.
Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed.
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the
conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external
antennas. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna Frequency Antenna Impedance VSWR 1 Max Polarization Cable Cable &
type range gain (dBd) power loss connector
1140.27 824– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear -0.55/ Mini Low
894/1710– specified vertical -0.82 Loss 2.5
1880/ freq. dB/m m, SMA
1850–2170 male
MHz
1140.26 890– 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ 10 W Linear Mini Low
960/1850– specified vertical Loss 2.5
1990/ freq. m, SMA
1710–2170 male
MHz

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Keysight or Smarteq. If you
are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and
cable loss information from the manufacturer.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings.

68
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

5.3.6.3 Device configuration for GPS receivers

In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label
can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.
Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600.
Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values
for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value
for Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver
documentation.
After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

69
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.7 Configuration Manager - View groups

Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View groups
are sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group from the plus
icon , and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon . When
you select a view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand panel displays the views
that are saved in the view group. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the
view name.
• You can quickly switch between the view group tabs with the following quick keys:Ctrl +
Tab/Ctrl + PageDwn = Next tab (right)
• Ctrl + Shift + Tab/Ctrl + PageUp = Prev tab (left)
• Ctrl + T = New tab

70
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.3.8 Configuration Manager - Workspaces

Under the Workspaces item are listed all the workspace that are currently loaded. Workspaces
are sets of view groups that are open at the same time. You can edit and move individual views
from one view group to another and individual view groups from one workspace to another.
When you select an individual view group, the right-hand panel displays the views that are saved
in the view group. It is also possible to create new view groups.

71
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.4 Measurement Properties dialog

The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the
device type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies supported by the
device.

5.4.1 Measurement Properties – General

Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that
Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name
yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The
network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you
have been monitoring.
BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver
connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be
drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the … button to browse for
a BTS file (.nbf or .csv).
BTS template file defines how customer-specific BTS data is imported into Nemo Outdoor.
Please refer to chapter
Importing BTS data for more information.
Cell whitelist file is a feature needed in emergency call testing. It specifies a list of cells from
which emergency call testing is possible.
Subscriber number can be entered manually in case the information cannot be read from the
device with AT-commands.

72
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.4.2 Measurement Properties – Measurement

On the Measurement Properties – Measurement page you can define various measurement-
related settings. For example, you can define what services will be tested, which data protocols
are used, and whether layer messages are logged or not. Note that the selection is device-
specific.

5.4.2.1 Services
Voice Call opens the Voice Call dialog.
DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a
voice call.
Short Messaging Service. See chapter SMS testing for more information.
USSD Message button opens the USSD Testing dialog. See chapter USSD testing for more
information on USSD testing.
Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See
chapter MMS testing for more information on MMS testing.
Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog.
Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See chapter Making video calls for
more information.
Packet Session opens the Packet session settings dialog.
Supported Data Protocols opens a list of available data protocols. Clicking the field of a data
protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol.
Custom AT Commands offers the possibility to run custom AT commands with certain test
terminals. The available commands are device-specific. Type in the AT command and click Send
Command. The AT commands and responses are saved in the measurement file.

73
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Incoming call option opens the Incoming Call Configuration dialog. See chapter Receive call for
more information.

5.4.2.2 Measurement options

Under Measurement Options you can enable and disable various measurement options, such as
layer messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in
the measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on the
measurement device used. These options are also accessible through the Devices view.

When the EVRC MOS compensation option is enabled, the Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ)
tool is biased against the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) used in CDMA networks and
other codecs in this family (EVRC-B and EVRC-WB). MOS value is incremented by 0.318MOS.

Incoming call mode defines how incoming calls are handled. The options are answer, reject, and
ignore. You can also define a delay (in seconds) when the Answer option is selected. If you select
Answer, you can further define a list of numbers from which calls are allowed. Calls from all other
numbers will be rejected. Click the … next to the Incoming call mode field. In the Allowed
Incoming Call Numbers dialog, define the allowed phone numbers in format CC (NDC) SN where:

74
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• CC = country code (optional)

• NDC = national destination code (in parentheses, mandatory)
• SN = subscriber number (mandatory)

For example, 358 (50) 1234567.

With Qualcomm and Shannon-based devices, you can enable/disable the IMS mode. When IMS
is disabled only CS call type is allowed and VoLTE, ViLTE, VoWiFi and ViWiFi call types are
disabled. When IMS is enabled, CS call, VoLTE, ViLTE, VoWiFi and ViWiFi calls are enabled. In
script commands, the IMS enable/disable commands are available under forcing functions.

With Qualcomm-based terminals there are several different Voice call methods. Voice call
method is device specific. Trace interface 2 method should be used with MultiRAB testing. When
a voice call is terminated, the PS data connection might be released with UEs using the Trace
interface call method to make voice calls. In such a case, it is recommended to use the Trace

75
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

interface 2 call method. Please check the Device Configuration Guide or release note for device-
specific information.

With Qualcomm-based terminals there is a number of different Video call methods and the
correct method must be selected to be able to make video call testing.
With the Select AMR codecs option, you can force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode.
For example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR
codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.

Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data
connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement
terminal.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the
Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement.
This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and
decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

5.4.2.3 Measurement settings

With the Force detach when entering idle mode option selected, a GPRS detach is forced when
the measurement device enters idle mode.
Enable diagnostic data logging option enables/disables Qualcomm raw packet logging. When
diagnostics data logging is enabled, you can select individual Qualcomm trace messages to be
stored in a separate binary file (.NBL). Both NBL and NMF files can be opened and played back
with Nemo Outdoor and Qualcomm raw data messages can be fully decoded in the grid view for
further analysis. This functionality requires the Diagnostics Data Logging option.

Due to a high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated
during a normal drive test.

76
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Currently, the following diagnostic messages are available:

• DCI Information report
• DL Transport block
• LL1 PUSCH Tx Report
• LTE MAC UL Transport block
• MAC UL transport block
• MAC UL Tx stat
• PDCP UL stat
• PUCCH TX report
• RLC DL ALL PDU
• LTE ML1 random access request (MSG1) report
• LTE ML1 random access response (MSG2) report
• LTE ML1 UE identification message (MSG3) report
• LTE ML1 contention resolution message (MSG4) report
• LTE RLC DL AM All PDU
• LTE RLC UL AM All PDU
• LTE ML1 PDCCH-PHICH indication report
• LTE ML1 uplink packet build indication
• LTE ML1 PDSCH stat indication
• LTE LL1 PUCCH CSF Log
• LTE LL1 PUSCH CSF log
• LTE LL1 PDSCH decoding results

77
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.4.3 Measurement Properties – Frequency scanning with mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports frequency scanning.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the
mobile.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With
Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM,
GSM900 and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different
operators.
Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC
threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in
a grid view.

78
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels button to
define the channels to be scanned.

Select the Show channels as frequencies option to view the channels in MHz.
In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the
Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be
viewed. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.
The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to
the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply
double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning,
click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers
in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands are selected, you have the
possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is
selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from
current band.

79
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.

In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which
the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the
Top-N field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button
to clear the table.

80
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.4.4 Measurement Properties – Pilot scanning with mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the
terminal supports pilot scanning.

The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile.
Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with CPICH
RSCP above the set value.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With
Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also
include the possibility to benchmark different operators.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in
a grid view.
Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.

81
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5.4.5 Measurement Properties – Frequency, pilot, and spectrum scanning

with scanners
Please refer to the separate scanner guides, Nemo FSR1 User Manual and Nemo Scanner Guide,
included in the product package.

5.4.6 Measurement Properties - Script

In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Script Settings
button in the Devices window.

In the Script file field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script
files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see chapter Making script
files).
With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the
same group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups.
By default the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new script groups
by selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new
script group in the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use
script groups, the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface
Properties (see User Interface Properties – Measurement).
When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all
script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized.

82
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice
quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For
example, script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their
script files are synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second
script group. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each
device.

83
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6 During Measurements
When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the process
in a number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable.
In the following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some
examples are given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements,
see chapter Troubleshooting.

84
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.1 Textual notes

It is possible to add textual notes at points of interest during measurements. Click the Add
Textual Note button in the toolbar. Note that you need to start recording before the button is
activated.

You can either type the note in the field or select a predefined text and click OK. To save new
predefined notes, type in the text, click the arrow next to the OK button and select Add
predefined text. Next time the text will be available in the drop-down menu at the top.
The textual notes can be viewed during playback, for example, in an events grid.

6.2 Nemo Cloud

Nemo Cloud is an optional feature for web-based remote-controlled measurements. In Nemo
Outdoor it can be purchased as Basic (with file synchronization, remote control and monitoring)
or Premium (with file synchronization, remote control, automatic sessions and monitoring).
To log in to Nemo Cloud, go to Nemo Cloud page in the ribbon bar and click Settings to open
the Nemo Cloud settings dialog.

Enter the service address, username, password, and network interface to connect to Nemo
Cloud.

85
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can also add the name of the driver performing the test drive and the driver’s phone number.

If the Enable backup option is selected, a local copy of the measurement files sent to Nemo
Cloud will be made on the Nemo Outdoor laptop.

Note that Nemo Outdoor uses by default the topmost network interface in the Windows
routing table when communicating with Nemo Cloud. To manually select the interface,
please see chapter Changing the priority order of network interfaces.

The Output feed displays the status of the connection.

After logging to Nemo Cloud you need to activate the Remote Mode. Select Go to Remote Mode
in the ribbon bar. When the remote mode is enabled the button displays the option Go to
Normal Mode. In remote mode the Nemo Outdoor unit is controlled through Nemo Cloud
whereas in normal mode, control is done through the Nemo Outdoor unit. Once the remote
mode is activated, an automated maintenance operation will be performed. It is also possible to
perform maintenance manually by selecting Maintenance in the ribbon bar.

When the remote mode is enabled, click Maintenance.

Note that you need to perform the maintenance session manually in Nemo Outdoor
before you can assign the Nemo Outdoor unit to projects in Nemo Cloud. The unit is
displayed in the unit list on the Dashboard page before performing the maintenance
session but is not displayed as an available unit when creating a project. After
maintenance is performed the unit list on Nemo Cloud is updated and the unit can be
assigned to projects.

Once logged in to Nemo Cloud you are able to view information about your Nemo Cloud option
by clicking the About Nemo Cloud button on the ribbon bar.

Settings opens the Nemo Cloud connection settings dialog.

Web interface opens the Nemo Cloud web interface.
Logout logs the Nemo Outdoor unit out from Nemo Cloud. The unit is still displayed on the unit
list in Nemo Cloud but in offline state.
Exp. date displays the expiration date of the product licence.
Unit ID displays the Nemo Outdoor device MAC address.
Username displays the user name created in Nemo Cloud.
Active project displays the name of the active project (if there is one) assigned to the unit.
Close closes the About Nemo Cloud dialog.

86
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When there is an active project run on the unit from Nemo Cloud, information regarding the
measurement session is displayed on the Output feed and on the Remote sessions view on Nemo
Outdoor.

With automatic sessions (Nemo Cloud Premium Only) unit configuration is downloaded and unit
reports and measurement files are sent automatically at regular intervals based on unit
configuration. For manually uploading files with Nemo Cloud, select Nemo Cloud | Manage Files
in the Ribbon bar. You can drag and drop files to make copies between local folder and Nemo
Cloud. For example, script files can be uploaded through Manage files. However, to upload
measurement files, maintenance is required. It can be done afterwards for example through WiFi
connection.

87
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Status information about Nemo Cloud is displayed under the ribbon bar. Status shows when
Nemo Cloud is in remote mode, or for example recording. Output window shows updated
information about data and configurations that are sent between the unit and Nemo Cloud.

For send options with Nemo Cloud, see Nemo Cloud send options.
For more information about Nemo Cloud, see Nemo Cloud user manual.

6.2.1 Changing the priority order of network interfaces

Nemo Outdoor uses by default the topmost network interface in the Windows routing table when
communicating with Nemo Cloud. Typically the LAN/WiFi interface will get the highest priority
automatically. This can be changed manually by changing the priority order of network
interfaces.
Windows uses an automatic metric feature to prioritize certain interfaces over others. However,
you can override the automatic setting and set the metric value manually.
To configure the Automatic Metric feature:
1. In Control Panel, double-click Network Connections.

88
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

2. Right-click a network interface, and then select Properties.

3. Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.

4. On the General page, click Advanced.

89
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5. On the IP Settings page, clear the Automatic metric option and enter the metric that
you want in the Interface metric field.

Lower value means higher priority, but avoid using ‘1’ as this is typically reserved for
loopback address.

6.2.2 Work orders

Work orders are pre-configured sessions that contain all the necessary information and files
needed for specific measurements. The work orders are non-scheduled, i.e. they do not have an
exact start and stop time. Instead, the test engineer can select from available work orders and
decide when to run them.
Work orders are created in Nemo Cloud and sent to measurement units during a maintenance
session. Please refer to the Nemo Cloud user guide for more information on creating work
orders.
After performing a maintenance session with Nemo Outdoor, the available work orders appear in
the Remote Sessions view.
Click Activate session to select the work order that you would like to run.

You will need to start recording manually.

90
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When the work order is complete, stop the measurement. Depending on your project settings,
the measurement files will be uploaded to Nemo Cloud or Nemo Xynergy in the next
maintenance session.

6.3 Nemo Commander remote control option for Nemo Outdoor/ Invex
Note that Nemo Outdoor 7.90 or later no longer supports measurements with Nemo
Commander.

Nemo Outdoor measurement units can be remotely configured and controlled with Nemo
Commander. This requires the Remote option in Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex and the Nemo
Commander SW. All the same user interface functionalities are available in remote mode as in
normal mode. For more information on the Nemo Commander SW, please refer to the Nemo
Commander user manual.
In order to use TeamViewer for controlling the Nemo Outdoor units, the TeamViewer application
must be installed on the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Please refer to the Nemo Commander user
manual for more information.
To configure the Remote mode, select Remote | Settings.

Note that if the Remote tab does not appear in the ribbon, your Nemo Outdoor license
does not have the Remote option.

91
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

On the User Interface Properties – Remote page, select Yes for Enable remote mode. When
Remote mode is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will automatically perform a maintenance session at
startup. Also the manual Maintenance tool is activated in the Remote tab.

6.3.1 Nemo Commander server options

FTP protocol is used to transfer data between field units and Nemo Commander. Commander
Server options define the server (FTP) address, username, and password.

Add the FTP server host name or IP address.

Leave Username, Remote folder, and Password fields empty. This information is
generated by the system and the fields are updated after the initial maintenance
session.

Use secure protocol: Select in case SFTP protocols is used in the server
Use passive mode: With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection

92
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.3.2 Initial field unit configuration

1. Build the Nemo Outdoor HW configuration, in other words, connect the measurement
devices (phones, USB modems, and scanners) to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.
2. A dedicated PS data connection (e.g. 3G/4G USB modem or smartphone, active only
during maintenance sessions) is required to establish the connection between Nemo
Outdoor and Nemo Commander. Connect the device to the Nemo Outdoor laptop and
install the necessary drivers. Do not add the device to Nemo Outdoor as it will not be
used as a measurement device.
3. Synchronize date and time settings between the Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Commander
computers.
4. Enable the Remote mode on the Nemo Outdoor User Interface Properties – Remote
page and define the Commander Server settings.
5. Select Maintenance from the Remote tab.
• The Nemo Outdoor unit connects and registers to Nemo Commander.
• The HW configuration of the Nemo Outdoor unit is uploaded to Nemo Commander.

Step 5, Maintenance, must be repeated every time the HW configuration changes.

6.3.3 Measurement workflow

1. Nemo Commander: Define measurement sessions for the field unit(s)
• Scripts for each device
• Session start/stop time
2. Nemo Outdoor: Power on laptop and all test devices
• Nemo Outdoor starts automatically
• Status report is uploaded to Nemo Commander
• Measurement session is downloaded from Nemo Commander
• Measurements are started automatically according to the downloaded configuration
• Periodic status reports are sent to Nemo Commander (configured in Nemo Commander)
3. Nemo Commander: Verify the HW configuration from latest status report (optional)
• If incorrect, contact driver
4. Nemo Outdoor: End measurements
• Measurements are stopped at the scheduled time
• Log files and status reports are uploaded to Nemo Commander

93
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.3.4 Events reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander

The following measurement events are reported by Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex to Nemo
Commander.
Status events:
• Start measurement
• Stop measurement
• GSP fix lost
• GSP fix acquired
• Device responding
• Device power off request
• Device restart
• High voltage shutdown
• Battery operation
• Battery shutdown
Errors:
• Start measurement failed
• Device not responding
Warnings:
• Low voltage
• High voltage
• Battery voltage low

6.4 Making scanning measurements

Please refer to the Nemo FSR1 user manual or Nemo Scanner Guide for information on scanner
measurements.

6.5 Making voice calls

To make voice calls:
1. In the Measurement Properties, Measurement page (see Measurement Properties –
Measurement), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice
Call field. Click OK.
2. Select Start Voice Call from the Measurement Control menu in Devices view or run a
script.

94
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you stop the script manually.

3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the
Measurement Control menu in Devices view. If you are running a script, wait until the
script is finished.

Call type in the call attempt event (CAA) is written as a voice call, not VoLTE or WLAN
IMS voice call when a call is generated via Nemo Outdoor user interface. This is because
the call type is unknown at the time of the call attempt. Call type in the call connection
event (CAC) should be observed.

With networks using encryption, it is required to perform radio off/ radio on for the
VoLTE/ VoWifi/ ViWifi and wait ~40 seconds. During this time, SIP server registering is
shown in the user interface even if the UE is already registered. After this,
measurements can proceed normally.

During recording, the user cannot enable WLAN measurements. WLAN measurement
needs to be enabled before starting measurement. In this case, the user needs to enable
WLAN from the device UI manually.

When enabling WLAN measurement from Nemo Outdoor, a notification Turning on Wi-
Fi will turn off USB Tethering. Continue? is shown in device UI. WLAN will not be
activated before user responds to the dialog. This dialog will not affect the functionality,
the connection between NMR and Nemo Outdoor stays active.

If the device is in Airplane Mode and WLAN is activated, device handler starting may fail.

”SIP server registration type” is not updated until the next SIPREGA/SIPREGC events are
written. Information is also not updated with WLAN IMS voice -> LTE IMS voice and LTE
IMS voice -> WLAN IMS voice events.

If WLAN is disconnected/disabled, WLAN IMS SIP server registered status stays visible
in Nemo Outdoor UI.

95
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.5.1 Voice Call Settings

Voice call settings are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality
measurements. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog
and the Voice Call Settings dialog will be opened. The dialog has two pages: one for outgoing
calls and one for incoming calls.

Phone number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number
must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is
transferred on the line. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.
• Fixed: The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration
values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is
the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.
• Random: In addition to a fixed call duration, you can specify a random call duration by
specifying the minimum and maximum values in seconds. The call duration will be
randomly selected between the specified values during measurements.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the
call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call
Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10
seconds.

96
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones
do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user
must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager
application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent
also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this
functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.
When Wait for call connection option is selected, a call script will move on to the next command
after receiving the CAA event after a voice call has been made. When the option is not selected,
the script will move on to the next command after a traffic channel is allocated (CAC1 event is
received).
Select the Enable end-to-end call option to activate voice call synchronization between two
devices connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system or between a device and Nemo Server.
Select the Nemo Server option as mode to enable voice call synchronization between a device
and Nemo Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can
define connection settings.
Select the Local device option as mode to activate end-to-end voice calls between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
Own number defines the A-party phone number.
Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not received
within the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause “Incoming call not received” is written to
the log file.
Select the Enable voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Audio mode defines which party, A or B, starts the audio transmission. In Normal mode, the
caller party starts with audio transmission and in Reverse mode the caller starts with audio
reception.
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With
the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample
length a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples:
10s.wav, 4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where
prefix is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal
precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format.
For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default
threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least
10 seconds.

97
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that
the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.
Tetra specific - Call type (enabled only for TETRA devices) defines what kind of calls will be
made. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and
PSTN.
• Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time
• Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by
pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button
• Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can
listen, and by pressing the PTT button, also speak
• Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT button
• PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile

6.5.2 End-to-end call instructions

In the User Interface Properties – Measurement dialog, set option Use ETSI compatible call
connection trigger to Yes. With this option, the call duration will be calculated from Alerting to
Call disconnected. It corresponds better to the call duration seen by the server.
Set option Enable end to end calls when server connection fails to Yes. With this option Nemo
Outdoor will perform the MO call, even if HTTP commands to the server fails.

98
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.5.2.1 Nemo Outdoor script settings

1. When end-to-end call synchronization is used, all the devices must have the same
group ID, which can be set in device script settings as the Script group.
2. Devices in the same script group must use the same script files. Only the line number
and the own number can be different between scripts on different devices. Other call
settings must be the same. Otherwise, the server will not be able to predict the behavior
of the different terminals in the group correctly.

It is mandatory to set a Wait for script synchronization command before the MO or MT

calls. Always use wait commands between call commands. The minimum wait time
should be 10 sec.

99
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Figure 1. Mobile originated call settings (make a voice call).

100
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Figure 2. Incoming call setting (receive call)

3. Own number (subscriber telephone number) must be defined in both Make a voice call
and Receive call commands.
4. Server line (Nemo Server phone number) must be defined in the Receive call command.
5. Only end-to-end call settings should be defined. For example, the Request voice call
callback in Voice Call Configuration must be set to No.

101
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Figure 3. Nemo e2e server settings

6. Nemo Server settings are global settings that are written in the PC registry. This means
that these settings are not transferred within a script file. If the script files are copied
from a Control PC to another user, these settings must be written again.
6.5.2.2 Nemo Server configuration
1. Channel callback settings must be set to off.
2. Configure all server channels with correct RemoteNumbers and LineNumbers before
making any end-to-end commands.
3. Restart the VQD service after channel configuration is done and each time the
configuration is changed.
4. If measurements are stopped and restarted, wait for 200 seconds between the changes
so that the possibly running server side timers are finished before the new test begins.
5. If grouping is changed so that, for example, one handset is removed from the script
group, change the group name. Otherwise the grouping stays the same on the server
side also for channels that were part of the last group. Alternatively, configure the
removed handset with an empty group and let it command the server once to clear the
group from that channel.
6. Make a configuration command (e.g. one test call cycle) on good RF conditions.

Nemo Server side grouping stays valid until automatic service restart happens at 3:00
am. A new configuration command executed by the field unit is required on daily basis.
Also when the VQD service is stopped or started or when the Nemo Server is shut down
or rebooted.

102
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.5.2.3 Starting a measurement and running a script

It is important, that after starting a measurement, the HTTP commands go through from all the
terminals to the server at least once. This enables the server to synchronize and detect all the
devices belonging to the same group.

When changing from synchronized measurements to non-synchronized or individual

tests, the field user has to wait at least until the server-side parameter FileCloseTimeout
(seconds) has been elapsed from the end of the last call. This is because the server
purges the channel grouping only after the measurement file is closed for all group
channels. By default the FileCloseTimeout is 200 seconds.

6.5.2.4 Configuring manual end-to-end voice calls

With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to make end-to-end voice call testing between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
1. Add two phones to Nemo Outdoor: Device A and Device B
2. Open the Voice Call Properties for Device A by double-clicking the Voice Call item in the
Devices view.

103
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. Enter Device B phone number in the Number field.

4. Select the Enable end-to-end call option.

5. Select the Local device option and select Device B from the list. Click OK.
6. You can now start making voice calls from Device A to Device B.

104
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.5.2.5 HTTPS Options

In the HTTPS Options dialog you can define the connection settings for the Nemo Server.

Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the Remote
folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.
When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer.
You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, using mobile broadband, or using one of the network interfaces offered by Windows.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
With the Test connection tool you can test the HTTPS server connection.

6.5.3 Push-to-Talk (PTT) testing

Nemo Outdoor supports QChat (developed by Qualcomm) and Kodiak Push-to-Talk (PTT)
technologies. QChat Push-to-Talk (PTT) calls must be performed using the keypad of the phone
when used with Nemo Outdoor. Kodiak PTT calls can be made using UI commands in Nemo
Outdoor.
Normal call events and statistics are written when attempting or ending PTT calls. Different
states of PTT calls, such as idle, getting ready to receive, receiving, transmitting are written to
VCHI event. Please see the file format specification for further information. RTP packets are

105
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

recorded and decoded with Nemo Outdoor. Qchat and Kodiak PTT are optional features in Nemo
Outdoor and require a license option.

6.5.3.1 Kodiak Push-to-Talk

Kodiak PTT devices are connected with Nemo Outdoor as Bluetooth devices. After the device has
been paired with the laptop, check the COM port number from the Windows Bluetooth Devices
dialog.
Start Nemo Outdoor and add the device (Add New Device | Phone | Qualcomm). In the Device
Configuration dialog, select the COM port assigned for your device in the Kodiak PTT port field
and click OK.

106
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Measurement Properties – Measurement page, double-click the Kodiak PTT call item to
open the Kodiak Call Configuration dialog.

Call type defines what kind of call will be made. The options are one to one, one to many, and
group call.
Recipients defines to whom the call is made. The recipients are selected from the contact list of
the Kodiak application and are defined as index numbers. For example, if you would like to make
a call to the first contact on the contact list, enter 0. If the selected call type is one to many,
define several recipients and separate the index numbers with semicolons. If the selected call
type is group call, select the recipient from the group contact list of the Kodiak application and
again, use the index number.
After the call type and recipients have been defined, select Register Kodiak Server to login to the
Kodiak server.

107
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

After you have registered to the Kodiak server you can start a Kodiak call.

Once the Kodiak call has been established, select Press PTT Button/Release PTT Button.

From Events grids, you can observe the Kodiak call events.

108
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In addition to calls, you can send IPAs. Go to Measurement Properties – Measurement and
double-click the Instant Personal Alert item. Define the recipient (only one at a time) and click
Send Message.

6.6 Voice quality measurements

Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality
measurements. Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete
instructions on setting up and making voice quality measurements.

6.6.1 Video Quality Monitoring

Telchemy's industry-leading VQmon® performance analysis technology is available as an
optional feature with Nemo Media Router application. It obtains a wealth of quality metrics and
analytics for video calls. It provides accurate QoE scores and critical diagnostics for every mobile
video session.
The technology works by assessing packet flows, looking for time-varying packet loss and jitter
and assessing the impact of such on media streams providing video MOS.
VQmon is an advanced VoIP perceptual quality estimation algorithm that incorporates support
for key international standards including ITU-T P.564, ITU-T G.107, ITU-T G.1020, ETSI TS 101
329-5 Annex E and IETF RFC 3611. VQmon is a "no-reference" algorithm that does not use the
original reference signal, and therefore is able to derive call quality scores using typically less
than one thousandth of the processing power needed by the P.862.x and P.863 approaches.
VQMon algorithm runs on NMR device. Each NMR device requires its own license. Only one
license is needed. E.g. Nemo Handy and Nemo Media Router use the same VQMon license.
When NMR device is licensed for VQMon, users do not need to configure any settings from
Nemo Outdoor measurement properties. Quality metrics are automatically reported for video
calls. Please note that certain limitations apply depending on handset model and type.
• Provides video MOS, VoLTE, ViLTE, VoWiFi and ViWiFi. Requires RTP packet access
• Key parameters:
o Video quality MOS absolute
o Video quality MOS relative
o Video quality MOS absolute
o Video quality MOS relative
o Video quality average bitrate
o Video codec
o Video MOS testing
• Supported with handsets providing RTP packet information during IMS video calls.
Verified handsets:
o H1
o H2

109
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• Requires NMR IMS Video Call Quality Option HA0900-01

POLQA voice quality testing is not supported with VoWiFi and ViWiFi measurements at
the moment.

6.7 Making video calls

Terminals verified by Keysight support video calls. However, video call testing with
Android-based devices is not supported.

Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog to access the
Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.

Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.94 VoLTE option is required for video over LTE testing.

Number defines the number where the video call will be made.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones
do not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user
must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager
application. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent
also caller id to Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this
functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5.0 or later.
Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality
settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

110
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With
the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample
length a maximum of 30 seconds.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where
prefix is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal
precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format.
For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default
threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor. See chapter Making script files for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time
between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10
seconds.

CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that
the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started
from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note
that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay
Between Call Attempts parameter.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call
attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the
call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call
Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10
seconds.

Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings
to be made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | Measurement, and
select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.

Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that
works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.
• Method 1 - Samsung Z105
• Method 2 - Samsung Z107
• Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung
ZX20
• Method 4 - Samsung ZV10
• Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
• Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
• Method 7 - LG KU950, LG KF700
• Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal
keypad)
• Method 9 - Samsung G800

111
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• Method 10 - Not used

To make video calls:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you
wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.
2. Select Make Video Call from the Measurement Control menu in the Devices view or run
a script.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you stop the script manually.

3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are
running a script, wait until the script is finished.

Video call testing is supported on any video call – capable terminal based on Qualcomm
chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method from
Measurement Properties | Measurement prior to making the call. The selected method is
saved to the device configuration file.

6.8 Data transfers

With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you
have several data protocol options for making data transfers.
The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data
transfer needs to be set up and configured individually.
Multiple concurrent data transfers can be made manually or with scripts. To make multiple
concurrent data transfers manually, go in online mode and activate a packet session. Then select
Start New Data Transfer and the desired protocol.

112
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet
decoding function (Measurement Properties - Measurement) prior to performing data
measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file
will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the
measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture
information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

6.8.1 Configuring the data connection

Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection
that is used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.

If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties. If you are making PS data
transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings.

113
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.1.1 Data Call Properties dialog

Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the Data
Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view.
There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The UMTS
and CDMA views just have fewer parameters.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Number defines the number of the server.

Username refers to the server username.
Password refers to the server password.
Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data
call.
Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.
Modem type refers to the modem type that the server is using. The alternatives are Analog (v.34)
and ISDN (v.110 and v.120).
Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction.
Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.
Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link
Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best
channel coding.

114
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.1.2 Packet session settings

Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-
click the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.

All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to
make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.

115
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.1.3 TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)

With Iperf testing it is recommended to use Nemo Server at all times, as the original
Iperf service is slightly modified. Receive direction was added so that only minimum
amount of data is sent to uplink. However, standard iPERF server can be used
performing only UL or UL+DL data transfers. DL only data transfer mode requires Nemo
Server.

Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals,
each connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Note that Firewall should be turned off.

Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
5001.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
6015.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both.
Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer
attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be

116
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is from
0 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too
small, it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the
retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the
window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with
HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms.
To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s *
0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB. Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):

Max. throughput ~RTT (ms) TCP window size TCP window size (kB)
(kbit)
64 kbps (GPRS/ 600 38.4 4.8
EDGE)
128 kbps (GPRS/ 600 76.8 9.6
EDGE)
256 kbps (GPRS/ 600 153.6 19.2
EDGE)
384kbps (Rel. 99) 200 76.8 9.6
HSDPA 1.8Mbps 100 180 22.5
UE category 3 & 4
HSDPA 3.6Mbps 100 360 45
UE category 5 & 6
HSDPA 7.3Mbps 100 730 91.25
UE category 7 & 8
HSDPA 10.2Mbps 100 1020 127.5
UE category 9
HSDPA 14.4Mbps 100 1440 180
UE category 9

Table 1. TCP window size.

TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a
validation from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not
guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower
layers. If higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For
example, if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured
to 400kbit/s, there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to
transmit successfully). Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it
limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired.
UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the
maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower
layers. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it
should be avoided. On the other hand, if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the
UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the
result of smaller data throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit

117
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP
datagram size is 1,460 bytes.
Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers.
Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.
Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer
finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data
packages is defined in the Packet Size field.

Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties
dialog, the Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer
data size option is used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has
been transferred. It is not limited by time.

When using a VPN connection, define the NMR VPN tunnel address to bind NMR to the correct
interface. This setting is needed only with NMR devices. Manual interface binding allows using a
VPN connection for data testing, for example for iPerf UDP data transfers.

Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties
button.

6.8.2 Configuring the FTP protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server
opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some
firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the
data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so
the firewall does not block the connection.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using FTP:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to configure the measurement
devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

118
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.2.1 FTP Transfer Properties dialog

Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Port refers to the port used by the FTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server.
Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case
the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections
so the firewall does not block the connection. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive
mode.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.

119
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one
FTP session.
Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For
example, the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo
Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer
sessions are started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a
fragment of the file. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume
is not supported with multithreaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start
from the beginning.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving
data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.
Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving
data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for
these files is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with FTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Occasionally FTP UL data throughput values can exceed the maximum value supported
by the network. This is seen at the beginning of data transfers. The root cause is that the
operating system can buffer the data.

120
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.3 Configuring the SFTP protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server.
Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP
module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is
initialized, the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through
this connection. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests,
and in that case the data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those
new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using SFTP:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

121
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.3.1 SFTP Transfer Properties dialog

Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling
over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, each connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

122
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one
SFTP session.
Number of threads defines the number of threads in multithreaded SFTP transfer.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
send for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we
recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt,
filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are
trying to write in the same file.

Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving
data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for
these files is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

6.8.4 Configuring the HTTP(S) protocol

The HTTP(S) testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
HTTP(S) protocol. The HTTP(S) protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP(S) testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP(S) protocol and this data
transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using HTTP(S):

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).

123
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

6.8.4.1 HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog

Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view.
The same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.
Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Select the appropriate Authentication Scheme and define the username and password for the
authentication.
Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. For sending, there are two options:
POST and PUT.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

124
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time
stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file.
Select the Enable multipart transfer option to activate multipart transfer for HTTP. The option is
available only with NMR devices.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For
example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.
If you are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer, type
the port number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals
without NMR, you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you
can use the same URL for all of them.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See chapter Making
script files for instructions on making scripts.
Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files
is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with HTTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.
User agent allows you to define the user agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is by
default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another user agent. Please see the http://user-
agents.my-addr.com/user_agent_request/user_agent_examples-and-user_agent_types.php for
further details about user agents.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.

6.8.5 Configuring the (HTTP) browsing protocol

The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred
through the HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP
testing, the user selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol
and this data transfer is measured.

If you are experiencing problems with HTTP browsing testing, such as, the page
downloading time is increased, disable the following LAN settings: Automatically detect
settings and Proxy server.

125
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To set up data measurements using HTTP browsing protocol:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement).
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define HTTP browsing-related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

6.8.5.1 Browser Transfer Properties dialog

Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the Devices
view.

URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over
an IPv4 connection.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

126
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Select or clear the Display browser window option to display/hide the browser window during
the data transfer.
If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are
written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information.
In the Additional headers field you can type a custom HTTP header, for example, for identifying
the user agent.
The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the
whole page is written to the measurement file. The cache is disabled by default. PPP and RLC
layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC data
throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was
active (PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo
Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze

For multi browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be
used for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as
each connection must have its own IP address (does not apply when NMR is used).

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.

6.8.6 Configuring the POP3 protocol

POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and
to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and
SMTP protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using POP3:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – POP3 dialog. Also define the test
e-mails that are used in the measurement.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

127
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.6.1 E-Mail Settings – POP3 dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view.

POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. You can also choose to use
IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals,
each connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.
Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.

128
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

6.8.7 Configuring the SMTP protocol

POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and
to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and
SMTP protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using SMTP:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – SMTP dialog. Also define the test
e-mails that are used in the measurement.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

129
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.7.1 E-Mail Settings – SMTP dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.

SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. You can also choose to use
IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must
have its own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own.
Therefore, it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators'
SIM cards.

Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

130
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to
open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message.

6.8.7.2 E-Mail Editor dialog

Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use. E-mail messages up to 100.000 characters or 1MB
are supported.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor.
Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail
messages.
Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use.
Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail.
Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.

131
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.8.8 Configuring the IMAP protocol

POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and
to monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and
SMTP protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using IMAP:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement).
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. Define IMAP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings – IMAP dialog. Also define the test e-
mails that are used in the measurement.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

6.8.8.1 E-Mail Settings – IMAP dialog

Open the E-Mail Settings (IMAP) dialog by double-clicking the IMAP item in the Devices view.

IMAP server settings define settings for the IMAP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the server. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

132
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must
have its own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used.

Port refers to the port used by the server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the server.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are
Tunneling, SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
IMAP receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will
save disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

6.8.9 Configuring the streaming protocol

Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, Microsoft Network Monitor
must be installed and IP packet capturing must be enabled. Refer to chapter IP packet
capturing for more information.

The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through
the streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the
streaming testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming
protocol and this data transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

In order to make streaming measurements with Nemo Outdoor version 7.20 onwards, you need
to have VLC player v. 2.1.0 or newer installed. With Nemo Outdoor versions 6.40 - 7.10, you
need to have VLC player v. 2.0.6 or newer (32-bit) installed on the computer. You can download
VLC from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.

133
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With Nemo Outdoor 6.2 and older versions, you need to have RealPlayer version 11 installed on
the computer. You can download RealPlayer 11 from http://www.real.com.

To set up data measurements using streaming:

1. Install VLC.
2. Install Microsoft Network Monitor.
3. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement mobile.
4. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties – Measurement
dialog. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement.
5. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
6. Define Streaming properties (see Streaming Properties).
7. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
8. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

6.8.9.1 Streaming Properties dialog

Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices view.

Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, VLC is not installed
on the computer. You can download a free player from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.

URL defines the IP address (http or rtsp) of the video file that will be streamed. For example,
rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm or videos from YouTube (m.youtube.com/video). Only one
file will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections,
you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive
downloads, create a script with several streaming sessions. See chapter Making script files for
instructions on making scripts. You can also choose to use IPv6 tunneling over an IPv4
connection.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time,
transfer will fail.
Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.

134
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the
streaming.

6.8.10 Configuring the trace route protocol

By conducting trace route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way
to the target server.
Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections.
The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is
also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another.
In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it
is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding.

A PPP compatible server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the server
(number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using the trace route protocol:

1. Follow the instructions in the Device Configuration Guide to connect and configure the
measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see
Measurement Properties – Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see
Packet session settings).
4. See below how to define Trace Route properties.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making script files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making
data transfers).

6.8.10.1 Trace Route Properties dialog

Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices
view.

The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route
measurement, for example, www.keysight.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server.

135
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. You can also choose to use IPv6
tunneling over an IPv4 connection.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals,
each connection must be given its own, separate IP address!

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the
same IP address can be used!

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the
computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.
HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.
HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target
server.
By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by
Nemo Outdoor.

6.8.11 Making data transfers

After you have configured the data connection and selected and configured the data protocol,
you can start making the data transfers.

Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.

To make data transfers:

1. Activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement
manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop
Scripts button.

2. To make manual CS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices
view and select Start Data Call. Wait until the call is connected and connection
established.
3. To make manual PS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices
view and select Start Packet Session. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP
context and make the GPRS attach.
4. To end the data transfer/data call, select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call.

6.9 Streaming video quality testing

Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the
network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports PEVQ-
S streaming video quality testing which can be done either on the PC or on a device that has
Nemo Media Router installed. A video preview can be seen during the measurement in Nemo
Outdoor.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex support multiple video streaming PEVQ-S connections. With
Nemo Outdoor up to eight devices, and with Nemo Invex up to six devices can be used

136
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

simultaneously to test streaming video quality in on-device mode, when PEVQ-S option is
enabled in Nemo Media Router application.

If a test handset has Nemo Media Router application without PEVQ-S option installed, it
prevents PEVQ-S testing as NMR test handsets are always online. In such case, to run
multiple PEVQ-S connections simultaneously, a dedicated PC is required with only one
NMR test handset connected to the PC.

6.9.1 NMR PEVQ-S license

Separate license exists for NMR-based PEVQ-S streaming analysis per test handset. In case
PEVQ-S license option is in NMR it is possible to perform the PEVQ-S streaming with NMR even
when Nemo Outdoor PEVQ-S license (PC/ Windows-based) is not enabled. Creating PEVQ-S
streaming scripts is always possible. In case both NMR and Nemo Outdoor includes license for
PEVQ-S testing, test algorithm is run on the smartphone using NMR. For test occasions running
the PEVQ-S algorithm on PC test handset should be added to Nemo Outdoor without NMR port
enabled.
Please note that if the PEVQ-S license for Nemo Media Router is also enabled the video
resolution forcing is not supported. In such a case the device must be added to Nemo Outdoor
without NMR port defined. Before starting video streaming quality measurements, select the
video quality algorithm used, PEVQ-S, from the Device Configuration – Voice/Video quality page.

In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PEVQ-S, you will need
to install WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player on the computer and to define PEVQ-S settings in
the PEVQ-S dialog. WinPCAP and Flash Player are available in the Nemo product package or you
can download them from the product websites.

137
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Making streaming video quality measurements with PEVQ-S:

1. Check that WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player are installed on the computer.
2. Select the PEVQ-S option from the Device Configuration – Voice/video quality page.
3. Define the PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.
4. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button. From the Measurement control
menu in the Devices view, select Start New Data Transfer to start the data transfer with
the selected test devices.
5. From the Measurement control menu in the Devices view, select Stop Data Transfer to
end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

6.9.2 PEVQ-S Properties dialog

When making video streaming quality measurements with the PEVQ-S algorithm, you need to
define some settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

Video offers a selection of videos that can be used in the testing. Only these preloaded videos
can be used for testing. The videos are available in folder Nemo Tools\Video Files.
Video quality defines the video resolution.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.
Select or clear the Display video stream option to display/hide the video stream window during
the data transfer.

6.10 Application testing

Nemo Outdoor offers several application testing features.

6.10.1 Screencasting and touchscreen simulation

The screencasting and touchscreen simulation offer an automated way to test almost any
application running on the Android smartphone. With screencasting it is possible to test, for
example video calls, Netflix, Googleplay, WhatsApp messages, Speedtest.net, and voice calls.
The screen of the handset can be seen in Nemo Outdoor in real time. The user can send virtual
touch commands to the device based on user interaction with the screencasting view. These

138
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

sequences of touch commands and physical button commands are recorded to separate
screencast macro files that can be saved and reused.

The functionality works with handsets locally connected to the Nemo Outdoor PC, as well as with
handsets connected to Nemo Invex chassis, with and without handset isolation modules (HIM/
SHIM).

Recording a screencasting macro file is allowed for one device at a time.

In addition to touchscreen simulation, the new screencasting features can be used, for example,
to change the handset settings and to perform OTA updates.
To open the screencasting view, click the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and
select Screencast.

139
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The view on the left shows the device screen in real time. The buttons at the bottom of the view
simulate the device’s Back, Home, and Power buttons.
The Screencast macro view on the right is used to record touchscreen simulations. Click the
Record macro button to start recording.

Use your mouse to control the device screen. The selected commands appear on the list.

140
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you are recording a script for Ookla Speedtesting, remember to import the results to
Nemo Media Router once the test is finished. With importing results, select Export to
CSV and Email, and select NMR as the export destination.

Stop the macro recording from the Stop macro button and save the macro. The macro file (.nscx)
will be saved in the Scripts folder.

141
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To load a macro file, click the Load macro button and select a file in the Screencast Macro File
Selection dialog. The same macro file can be used with several devices.

Macro files can be activated with script files using the Send Screencast Macro script command.

142
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.2 Facebook testing

In order to be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook account.
To start running Facebook tests, you will need to define some Facebook settings in the Facebook
Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Facebook item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Facebook item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Facebook testing.

If you already have a Facebook account, type in the Username. The username can be found from
the General Account Settings in Facebook.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.
User access token is required for Facebook testing. Enter the username and click the Get Access
Token button. You will be redirected to the Facebook login page. Enter your account information
and select the Keep me logged in to… option. Click Log In. You will return to Nemo Outdoor and
an access token will appear in the field.

143
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Application ID and Application secret fields are required only if you have your own application for
accessing Facebook. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty and the Nemo Fabo application
will be used by default.

When performing Facebook testing with multiple devices, use the same Facebook
account on all of them. With Nemo Invex II, use different UICs for the data connections
and then you can use individual Facebook accounts for each of them.

You can define an image or video that will be uploaded on the wall of your Facebook profile.
Comment is text that will either be posted as a status update (without a photo) or as a caption
for a photo.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days the items will be retrieved
from the wall when the user executes the Get Wall Feed command.
After defining Facebook settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select one of the Facebook-related commands. The following
information is logged for each command: operation type, success/failure, time elapsed, and
amount of data received/sent.
• Get friend list will download the friend list from you Facebook account.
• Get wall feed will download the wall feed from you Facebook account. The amount of
data downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Facebook
Configuration dialog.
• Post status update will upload the text typed in the Comment field and post it on the
wall of your Facebook profile.
• Post image will upload the photo selected in the Facebook Configuration dialog and the
text typed in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook profile.
• Post video will upload the video selected in the Facebook Configuration dialog and the
text typed in the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook profile.

144
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Please note that the maximum file size and duration for a Facebook video is 10 GB/4 h.

Please note that Facebook has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Facebook Help Center for current information about the limits. If you see an
error message, it means the Facebook limit has been reached. It is not a permanent
error, so the feed will continue to work, and once the limit is reset at the Facebook end
(daily), new posts will be posted again automatically.

Currently each app is given an allotment of 200 API calls per user in any given 60-
minute window. Please note that Facebook can change this limit. Please see more
details from: https://developers.facebook.com/docs/graph-api/advanced/rate-limiting.

Custom Facebook test applications offer more flexibilities to test Facebook with drive
test tools as some of the limits seen with normal Facebook apps do not apply, such as
number of allowed postings per hour. Please see the following link for further
information: https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps. To create your own
Facebook test application, please login to
https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register

If Facebook benchmarking is done using a commercial laptop, the same user account
settings must be used with all test devices.

6.10.3 Twitter testing

In order to be able to test the Twitter application, you will need to set up a Twitter account.
To start running Twitter tests, you will need to define some settings in the Twitter Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Twitter item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Twitter item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor
license does not support Twitter testing.

145
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you want to follow the Twitter feed of a specific user or a hashtag, type in the
username/hashtag in the @User/#Feed field without the @ or # symbols.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.

146
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

User access token and User access token secret are required for Twitter testing. Click the Get
Access Token button. You will be redirected to the Twitter login page.

Enter your account information and select the Remember me option. Click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and the access token and access token secret will appear in the field.
Application access token and Application access token secret fields are required only if you have
your own application for accessing Twitter. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.
You can define an Image that will be uploaded to your Twitter feed.
Comment is text that will be posted as a tweet.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days the items will be retrieved
from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.

147
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Please note that Twitter has its own limits for the number of account actions per day.
Check the Twitter Help Center for current information about the limits.

After defining Twitter settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Twitter and then one of the
Twitter-related commands.

Get User Feed will download your own Twitter feed.

Load Profile will download the Twitter feed from the selected user (defined in the Twitter
Configuration dialog, @User / #Feed field).
Follow Feed will download the feed from the selected Twitter hashtag. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Twitter Configuration dialog.
Post Feed will upload the text typed in the Twitter Configuration dialog, Comment field and post
it on your Twitter feed.
Post Image will upload the image selected in the Twitter Configuration dialog on your Twitter
feed.

148
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can follow Twitter-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.4 WhatsApp testing

With Nemo Outdoor you can test WhatsApp messaging and WhatsApp voice and video calls. In
order to test the WhatsApp application, you will need a device with NMR and the WhatsApp
testing license option.

To start running WhatsApp tests, install the WhatsApp application from Google Play on your test
device and create a WhatsApp account. Please follow the installation steps in the WhatsApp
application.

You must be able to receive phone calls and SMS to the phone number you are trying to
verify and you must have a working Internet connection through mobile data or WiFi.

Note that the WhatsApp account is subscription (SIM card) specific so have the phone
number available when creating the WhatsApp account. Once the WhatsApp account is
created, you must not change the SIM card. If the SIM card is changed, you must create
a new account in WhatsApp.

Once the WhatsApp application is installed and activated, start Nemo Outdoor and start the test
devices.

Please note that the WhatsApp item is not visible in the Devices view until you switch to
online mode in Nemo Outdoor.

149
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can test WhatsApp manually or with scripts. If you use a script, make sure to select the
Synchronize script repeats option from User Interface Properties.

150
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.4.1 Testing WhatsApp voice calls manually

1. Add two WhatsApp-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
originating party and the other as the receiving party.
2. First define the call settings for the receiving party. Select the device receiving calls and
double-click the WhatsApp item in the Devices view.

151
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In the WhatsApp Settings dialog, define the incoming call settings.

4. After defining the incoming call settings, return to the Devices view. Select the
originating device and double-click the WhatsApp item.

152
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5. In the WhatsApp Settings dialog, define the outgoing call settings. Make sure the call
duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call. Click OK.

6. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device receiving calls
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait incoming WhatsApp call.

153
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7. Next, select the device originating calls and click the Measurement Control button.
Select Start WhatsApp call.

8. You can follow WhatsApp-related statistics in a grid.

154
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.4.2 Testing WhatsApp video calls manually

1. Add two WhatsApp-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
originating party and the other as the receiving party.
2. First define the call settings for the receiving party. Select the device receiving calls and
double-click the WhatsApp item in the Devices view.

155
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In the WhatsApp Settings dialog, define the incoming call settings on the Incoming VoIP
Call page.

4. After defining the incoming call settings, return to the Devices view. Select the
originating device and double-click the WhatsApp item.

156
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5. In WhatsApp Settings – Outgoing Video Call page, define the outgoing video call
settings. Make sure the call duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call.
Click OK.

6. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device receiving calls
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait incoming WhatsApp call.

157
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7. Next, select the device originating calls and click the Measurement Control button.
Select Start WhatsApp Video Call.

158
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.4.3 Testing WhatsApp messaging manually

1. Add two WhatsApp-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
originating party and the other as the receiving party.
2. Select the device sending messages and double-click the WhatsApp item in the Devices
view.

159
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In the WhatsApp Settings – Data Transfer dialog, define the data transfer settings. You
can send either text or an image file. Also define the number of the receiving end.

Note that the receiving end also needs to have a WhatsApp account.

160
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device sending the
WhatsApp messages and click the Measurement Control button. Select Start New Data
Transfer –WhatsApp, Send Message or Start New Data Transfer –WhatsApp, Send
Image.

161
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5. You can follow WhatsApp-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.5 BiP testing

With Nemo Outdoor you can test BiP messaging and BiP voice and video calls. In order to test
the BiP application, you will need a device with NMR and the BiP testing license option.

To start running BiP tests, install the BiP application from Google Play on your test device and
create a BiP account. Please follow the installation steps in the BiP application.

You must be able to receive phone calls and SMS to the phone number you are trying to
verify and you must have a working Internet connection through mobile data or WiFi.

Note that the BiP account is subscription (SIM card) specific so have the phone number
available when creating the account. Once the account is created, you must not change
the SIM card. If the SIM card is changed, you must create a new account in BiP.

Once the BiP application is installed and activated, start Nemo Outdoor and start the test
devices.

Please note that the BiP item is not visible in the Devices view until you switch to online
mode in Nemo Outdoor.

162
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can test BiP manually or with scripts. If you use a script, make sure to select the Synchronize
script repeats option from User Interface Properties.

6.10.5.1 Testing BiP voice calls manually

1. Add two BiP-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the originating
party and the other as the receiving party.
2. First define the call settings for the receiving party. Select the device receiving calls and
double-click the BiP item in the Devices view.

3. In BiP Settings – Incoming VoIP Call, define the incoming call settings.

163
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. After defining the incoming call settings, return to the Devices view. Select the
originating device and double-click the BiP item.

5. In BiP Settings – Outgoing Call, define the outgoing call settings. Make sure the call
duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call. Click OK.

6. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device receiving calls
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait Incoming BiP call.

164
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7. Next, select the device originating calls and click the Measurement Control button.
Select Start BiP Call.

8. You can follow BiP-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.5.2 Testing BiP video calls manually

1. Add two BiP-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the originating
party and the other as the receiving party.
2. First define the call settings for the receiving party. Select the device receiving calls and
double-click the BiP item in the Devices view.

165
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In BiP Settings - Incoming VoIP Call, define the incoming call settings.

4. After defining the incoming call settings, return to the Devices view. Select the
originating device and double-click the BiP item.

166
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5. In BiP Settings – Outgoing Video Call, define the outgoing video call settings. Make sure
the call duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call. Click OK.

6. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device receiving calls
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait Incoming BiP call.

167
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7. Next, select the device originating calls and click the Measurement Control button.
Select Start BiP Video Call.

6.10.5.3 Testing BiP messaging manually

1. Add two BiP-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the originating
party and the other as the receiving party.
2. Select the device sending messages and double-click the BiP item in the Devices view.

168
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In BiP Settings – Data Transfer, define the data transfer settings. You can send either
text or an image file. Also define the number of the receiving end.

Note that the receiving end also needs to have a BiP account.

169
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device sending the BiP
messages and click the Measurement Control button. Select Start New Data Transfer –
BiP, Send Message or Start New Data Transfer –BiP, Send Image.

5. You can follow BiP-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.6 Viber testing

With Nemo Outdoor you can test Viber messaging and calls. In order to test the Viber
application, you will need a device with NMR and the Viber testing license option.

To start running Viber tests, install the Viber application from Google Play on your test device
and create a Viber account. Please follow the installation steps in the Viber application.

You must be able to receive phone calls and SMS to the phone number you are trying to
verify and you must have a working Internet connection through mobile data or WiFi.

Note that the Viber account is subscription (SIM card) specific so have the phone
number available when creating the Viber account. Once the Viber account is created,
you must not change the SIM card. If the SIM card is changed, you must create a new
account in Viber.

It is recommended to disable autocorrect from the test device.

Once the Viber application is installed and activated, start Nemo Outdoor and start the test
devices.

170
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Please note that the Viber item is not visible in the Devices view until you switch to
online mode in Nemo Outdoor.

You can test Viber manually or with scripts. If you use a script, make sure to select the
Synchronize script repeats option from User Interface Properties.

171
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.6.1 Testing Viber calls manually

1. Add two Viber-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
originating party and the other as the receiving party.
2. First define the call settings for the receiving party. Select the device receiving calls and
double-click the Viber item in the Devices view.

172
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In the Viber Settings dialog, define the incoming call settings.

4. After defining the incoming call settings, return to the Devices view. Select the
originating device and double-click the Viber item.

173
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

5. In the Viber Settings dialog, define the outgoing call settings. Make sure the call
duration is the same for the outgoing and incoming call. Click OK.

6. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device receiving calls
and click the Measurement Control button. Select Wait incoming Viber call.

174
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7. Next, select the device originating calls and click the Measurement Control button.
Select Start Viber call.

8. You can follow Viber-related statistics in a grid.

175
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.6.2 Testing Viber messaging manually

1. Add two Viber-capable devices to Nemo Outdoor. One device is set up as the
originating party and the other as the receiving party.
2. Select the device sending messages and double-click the Viber item in the Devices
view.

176
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. In the Viber Settings – Data Transfer dialog, define the data transfer settings. Define the
number of the receiving end and the text to be sent.

Note that the receiving end also needs to have a Viber account.

177
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. After defining the settings, return to the Devices view. Select the device sending the
Viber messages and click the Measurement Control button. Select Start New Data
Transfer – Viber, Send Message.

5. You can follow Viber-related statistics in a grid.

178
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.7 Instagram testing

In order to be able to test the Instagram application, you will need to set up an Instagram
account.
To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Instagram Configuration
dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Instagram item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Instagram item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Instagram testing.

If you already have an Instagram account, type in the Username.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.
User access token is required for Instagram testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will
be redirected to the Instagram login page. Enter your account information and click Log In. You
will return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application ID and Application secret fields are required only if you have your own application for
accessing Instagram. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty.

179
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Searchable tag/username defines a tag or a username from which the feed will be downloaded.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days the items will be retrieved
from the feed when the user executes the Get Feed command.
After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Instagram and then Get Self
Feed.

Get Self Feed will download your own Instagram feed.

You can follow Instagram-related statistics in a grid.

180
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.10.8 Netflix testing

In order to be able to test the Netflix application, you need:
• an active Netflix account
• Nemo Media Router (NMR) installed to the test phone
• Netflix application version v. 4.16.1 installed to the test phone. Download it from
https://netflix.en.aptoide.com
• to launch the Netflix application and login before starting measurements
• Netflix application running on the background

To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Netflix Properties dialog. Open
the dialog by double-clicking the Netflix item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Netflix item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor
license does not support Netflix testing.

URL defines the address of the Netflix video stream. For example,
http://netflix.com/watch/70297676?trackId=14170287
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the
connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time,
connection attempt will fail.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.
Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.
Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the
streaming.
Limit duration to defines the stream length in seconds.

181
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Netflix.

You can follow Netflix-related statistics in a grid.

6.10.9 Dropbox testing

In order to be able to test the Dropbox application, you will need to set up a Dropbox account.
To start running tests, you will need to define some settings in the Dropbox Configuration dialog.
Open the dialog by double-clicking the Dropbox item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Dropbox item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo
Outdoor license does not support Dropbox testing.

182
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will be
redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

Application access token is required only if you have your own application for accessing
Dropbox. Otherwise you can leave this field empty.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.

183
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer
if there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the
transfer will fail.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the Dropbox server. If you are
receiving data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.
Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving
data, this is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for
these files is defined in the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to
receive for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection.
Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.

After defining the settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select Start New Data Transfer | Dropbox. Nemo Outdoor will
perform the Dropbox data transfer.

You can follow Dropbox-related statistics in a grid.

184
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

File size is not written to the DREQ event and because of that, the device status does not show a
progress bar for DL or UL transfers.
With uplink data transfers the UL data throughput goes up and down. This is normal behavior as
the uploaded files are split to 4MB fragments and uploaded to server with separate upload
commands.

6.11 SMS testing

SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the
SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view.

Note that the Qualcomm IMS IR.92 VoLTE option is required for SMS over LTE testing.
In addition, if you are using the Samsung IMS, you will need the Samsung IMS IR.92
VoLTE option.

Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages.
Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example,
+3581234567.
Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the
messages are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings.
Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.
When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is
added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is
added to the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time
it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing.
All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000
characters.

185
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With IMS SMS testing it is not recommended to use more than 160 characters.

Making SMS testing measurements:

Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you
must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that
Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again.

To be able to calculate end-to-end delivery time in CDMA networks, SMS testing must
be done using the same operator between two terminals. This is due to the fact that
SMS message ID changes from operator to operator.

1. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces)
where you are sending the test SMS message.
2. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test
SMS. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.
3. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is
terminated.
4. Type in the test message and click OK.
5. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button in the ribbon, Home tab. From
the Devices view, select Measurement control | Send SMS Message to send an SMS
with the selected devices.
6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the Grid
Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).
Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. The grid
will now display only the selected SMS testing-related events.

6.12 MMS testing

MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network.
MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received
MMS messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded
enabling statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay.
Also separate delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message
sending/receiving are recorded.
In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related
settings in the Packet Session Settings dialog.

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.

Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must
not contain a PDP activation command.

6.12.1 Packet session settings for MMS

Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging
Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default.

186
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the
parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-
specific. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact
the operator of the network that you are measuring.
6.12.1.1 MMS
In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.

MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is
terminated.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is
terminated. In case of high MMS sending/receiving failures it is recommended to increase the
default time out time from 30 seconds to 60 seconds.
Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.
Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.

187
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.12.2 MMS Editor dialog

Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor.
Open MMS Message opens a premade MMS messages.
Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use.
Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message.
Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.

6.12.3 Making MMS measurements

Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements.

You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS
messages.

Making MMS measurements:

1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (see Packet session settings for MMS).
2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor.
3. If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements
(see Making script files).

188
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS
Message from the Measurement control menu or from the Measurement menu.
Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS.
5. If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.
This will start the measurement.
6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the Grid
Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).
Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. The
grid will now display only the selected MMS testing-related events.

6.13 USSD testing

USSD testing is not supported with Huawei UEs.

USSD testing allows you to monitor how USSD messages are transferred in the network. Open
the USSD Message dialog by double-clicking the USSD Message item in the Devices view.

Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the USSD sending attempt is terminated.
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit for USSD messages
is 182 characters.

Sending USSD messages:

1. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the message sending attempt is
terminated.
2. Type in the test message and click OK.

3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . In the Devices view, click
the Measurement Control button and select Send USSD Message to send a USSD
message with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the message.

189
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered
successfully. Open an event grid (Data Windows | New Grid | Event Grid). Open the Grid
Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).
Clear all selections and select the USSD item and click OK. The grid will now display
only the selected USSD message testing-related events.

6.14 Start external application

This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the
automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line
parameters. With Nemo Invex, you can run external applications also on the measurement
servers (UICs).
The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that
are not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are
not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the
PPP data throughput parameter.
The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written
to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to
minimum from the browser settings.
The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor. Select Start External
Application under General in the parameter tree on the right.

Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making
measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For
example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe.

190
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Please note that clicking the Browse button will only show the folders on the local
computer. If you want to run an external application on a measurement server (Nemo
Invex), check the path from that server, for example, with Remote Desktop and type in
the path manually.

If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external
application is closed.
Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is
started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL
(http://www.example.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be
no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field.
Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example,
C:\Temp.

6.15 ICMP Ping

The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping
measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.keysight.com.
You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will
respond to the ping.
Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines
the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet
that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.
Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the
server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout
parameter
(=-1).
Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where
the delay will occur. The options are:

191
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before
sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent
immediately after the reply.
• Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

The Delay from reply to request option is not available with NMR devices.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping
measurement is repeated.
Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until
you stop it manually.

Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. New request is sent
every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every
1000ms.

Ping reply
Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. New request is
sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent
every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

Ping reply

To make ping measurements:

1. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices
view.
2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK.
3. Click the Start Recording button.
4. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button and select Start Packet
Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says ‘PDP Context
Activated’.
5. From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping
until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping
measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.

192
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16 Indoor mode

Nemo Outdoor indoor mode should be used when making measurements indoors. The mode is
activated by clicking the Go to Indoor mode button in the ribbon, Measurement tab.
When the indoor mode is activated the functionality of Nemo Outdoor changes:
• To start measuring an Indoor window needs to be open and a floorplan loaded.
• When the measurement is started, the user is prompted to select the starting position in
the Indoor window. The selected location is used to automatically create the first marker.
• Measurement archive compression is enabled automatically, in other words, the files
below are compressed into a single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are
compressed, the original files are deleted. ZIP files can be drag-and-dropped to the
main window.
o measurement files (.nmf)
o binary files (.nbl)
o packet capture files (.pcap)
o marker files (.mrk)
o indoor map files (.tab and image)
• The floorplan file or the current floor layer cannot be changed during measurements to
prevent mismatch during post-processing.
• Information about the current mode (Indoor/Outdoor) is written to the measurement file
header.

6.16.1 Viewing indoor maps

Open an indoor map by selecting Data Windows | Indoor | New Indoor Window and select a map
file. The supported indoor map types are MapInfo, iBwave, and Google Earth maps (.kmz). Please
refer to Google Earth documentation on how to create KMZ files. KMZ and MapInfo maps have
the same functionalities. For more information on iBwave files, please see chapter iBwave maps.

193
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

It is possible to view selected parameters on an indoor map by drag and dropping them in it.
Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can
also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl
button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on
the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the
drop-down menu.

194
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement
file (.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click on
Move and select a new destination for the marker.

On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the
measurement and walking around in the building, use markers to draw the measurement route
on the floor plan. Markers are added by clicking the Add marker and Add marker on GPS position
buttons in the Indoor map toolbar.

Select the Add marker tool and click on the map. The marker will be placed in the selected
location. The Add marker on GPS position tool can be used only when measuring in Indoor mode
with a georeferenced floorplan and valid GPS coordinates. The marker will be placed in the
current location.
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map.
You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the
problem areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.

195
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.2 Floorplans and BTS files

You can also use BTS files on indoor maps. DAS and small cell BTS types are also supported.
Open a route on an indoor map. Click the Add BTS File button and browse for a BTS file.

196
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

After the BTS file is loaded, select a device that will be connected with the BTS file. Click OK.

The BTS icons will appear on the map and when the measurement file is played back, a line is
drawn from the test device to the serving base station.

197
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.3 Multiple routes and floorplans

You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in
the side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above.
The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default
color. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between
the color legends in the Color legends side panel.

You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the
Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors
on the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go
Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.

6.16.4 Indoor route planning

Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You
can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar,
and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is
also activated. A new route plan is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for

198
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the
map popup menu.

199
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with
outdoor maps. See chapter Route plans for more information.

Indoor maps can be also used when conducting measurements in metros.

6.16.5 iBwave maps

iBwave indoor maps can be viewed in Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to iBwave documentation on
how to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Outdoor. iBwave files may contain
UTM coordinates in addition to WGS84 coordinates. Nemo Outdoor supports both coordinate
formats when loading transmitter files. Please note that both the tab file and the transmitter file
must use the same coordinate system.
To view measurement data on iBwave maps, select Data Windows | Indoor | New Indoor Window.
Select an iBwave map file and click Open.

200
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If the map file contains several building, choose one of them and click OK.

The map is opened. With the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons you can move the view
between floors. From the Layers list you can hide and displays the different floors and the BTS
files for each floor.

Nemo Outdoor will not automatically place the measurement route on the correct floor.
Therefore, when making measurements on several floors, it is advised to make a separate log file
for each floor and, for example, include the floor number in the measurement file name.
Alternatively, you can add a textual note in the log file identifying the floor number in question.
This way you will be able to place the measurement route on the correct floor when playing back
the log file.

6.16.5.1 BTS files on iBwave maps

You can also view BTS sites on iBwave maps. An iBwave map file contains, by default, BTS sites
but you will also need a separate BTS file (.nbf or .csv) that has the same BTS sites with
matching cell IDs than the iBwave file. Without the .nbf/csv file, BTS cell information and
antenna directions will not be displayed.

201
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

First open an iBwave map and click the Add BTS File button to open the BTS file.

Select the BTS file and then select the device connected with the map. Click OK.

202
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The BTS file appears in the Layers panel but to make it appear on the map, you will need to
associate it with the iBwave BTS file. To do this, right-click one of the iBwave BTS layers and
select Properties.

Scroll down to Linked BTS file setting and select the BTS file that you opened on the map and
click OK.

The BTS sites and cell information are now displayed on the map.

6.16.6 DAS anomaly analysis

With DAS anomaly analysis, user can check and verify in-building small cells and DAS
(Distributed Antenna Systems) antennas giving simple pass, fail, or untested results for each cell.
Indoor small cell antennas and transmitters can be displayed on the indoor map with iBwave
indoor plans and Nemo BTS files (.nbf). DAS anomaly analysis is enabled from BTS Properties.

Please note that before you can activate DAS anomaly analysis, you will need to link a
BTS file to the map.

203
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Enable DAS anomaly analysis by selecting a device in the field.

Cell test radius in meters defines how close the marker needs to be to the cell in order to
perform the DAS anomaly analysis.
Cell transparency defines how the circle is drawn. 0% is almost solid color and 100% is
transparent.
Signal level limits (dBm) defines the pass/fail limit for signal level for each system. If the signal
level is above the defined limit, the test result is passed and if the signal level is below the limit,
the test result is failed.
Cell search mode defines on which sites the test is performed.
• Full: Requires that the BTS file contains the system, channel number, and scrambling
code information.
• System and channel: Requires that the BTS file contains the system and channel
number information. Use this option with iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does
not include the correct cell type information.
• System: Requires that the BTS file contains the system information. Use this option with
iBwave map files or if the BTS (.nbf) file does not include the correct cell type
information.
When the analysis is enabled, a circle is drawn around DAS and small cell cells. The color of the
circle depends on the cell test status:
• Untested = gray
• Failed = red
• Passed = green
Whenever a marker is placed within the test radius of the serving cell location, the current signal
level of the serving cell is checked. If the signal level exceeds the defined limit (signal level limit

204
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

defined in the BTS Properties dialog), the cell is considered as passed (green) and if the signal
level is below the configured limit, the cell is considered as failed (red).

The same analysis is also performed during playback mode if the DAS anomaly analysis is
enabled.
In addition to the map view, a DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the results for each
cell. The results view can be displayed/hidden from the indoor map popup menu.

6.16.7 RF ingress analysis

RF ingress analysis calculates distributions related to indoor (small cell and DAS) vs outdoor
(macro) cell coverage and gives real-time information of detected RF ingress. The analysis is
based on the cell type information read from the BTS file (.nbf). A cell is considered to be indoor
or small cell if the cell type in the BTS file is SMALL_CELL or DAS, otherwise the cell type is
macro cell.

Please note that a BTS file must be set for all devices before RF ingress measurement is
started. If a BTS file has not been selected, all cells will be considered as macro cells
and the statistics calculated will be incorrect.

The signal strength comparison is done for each system and the comparison is performed for
serving, neighbor, detected, listed and monitored cells in each system.
• LTE: RSRP
• UMTS: RSCP
• GSM: RXL Sub/RXL full (neighbor set)
• CDMA: RSCP

205
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can also plot RF ingress on a map using the colorset Cell type (RF Ingress).

206
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.8 Indoor map popup menu

Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout
of the map.

207
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.8.1 Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.
6.16.8.2 Custom window - Save changes
Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.
6.16.8.3 Custom window - Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.
The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom
window and define the custom window groups.
6.16.8.4 Save as - CSV file
Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format.
6.16.8.5 Save as - Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.
6.16.8.6 Save as - MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
6.16.8.7 Move view to
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.
6.16.8.8 Open map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).
6.16.8.9 Save map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the
map with another name.

208
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.8.10 Import map

You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as indoor maps. Click the
Import Map button in the map toolbar. Select an image file and click Open. The Map Import
Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you need to georegister the image
file or enter the exact dimensions of the map area.
To use georegistration, select Georegister and click OK. The image file will appear on the
Georegister Image map as a transparent box.

Adjust the location, width, height, and rotation of the image so that the image overlaps the right
spot on the map. Move the mouse cursor on top of the image so that the cursor changes into an
arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Now you can move the image on the map. To
move the map beneath the image, move mouse cursor on the map so that the cursor changes
into an arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Finally click OK to save the
coordinates.

209
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.8.11 Route plan - Create

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map
window, after which you can save the route plan.
6.16.8.12 Route plan - Open
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor
map.
6.16.8.13 Route plan - Save
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a route plan file (.gpx, .rpf with
Nemo Outdoor 8.0 and older) for later use.
6.16.8.14 Save as MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
6.16.8.15 Add waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.
6.16.8.16 Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With
the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection
changes the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can
scroll the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor
point. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can
also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the
measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during
measurements. It cannot be used during playback.
6.16.8.17 Center on new marker
The Center on New Marker option defines whether the indoor view is centered on a marker when
it is inserted.
6.16.8.18 Auto center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the
visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto
Center command is selected.

210
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.8.19 View entire map

The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.
6.16.8.20 View entire route
The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.
6.16.8.21 Textual comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on
the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and
select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.
6.16.8.22 Add site
With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter
Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.
6.16.8.23 Color legends
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.
6.16.8.24 DAS anomaly analysis results
When performing DAS anomaly analysis, the DAS anomaly analysis results table displays the
results for each cell. This command hides/displays the results view.
6.16.8.25 Show current position
Show Current Position tool allows you to show/hide the current position icon on the map.
6.16.8.26 Show layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.
6.16.8.27 Show marker info
Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.
6.16.8.28 Show markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.
6.16.8.29 Show minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window.
Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a
red square.
6.16.8.30 Show waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create
and save a route plan for later use. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with
waypoints for more information.
6.16.8.31 Show zones
You can view zones on iBwave maps. Zones in iBwave files are defined as MapInfo mif/mid files.
Right-click on the map and select Show Zones to display/hide the zones on the floorplan. Click

211
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

on a zone with the arrow tool to select the zone (the map is zoomed to the zone and the zone is
drawn less transparent).

6.16.8.32 Full screen

Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on
Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.
6.16.8.33 Layer Properties – Indoor map
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.
6.16.8.34 Indoor Properties dialog

Offset between routes defines the offset (in pixels) between routes on an indoor map. This value
is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would
overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for
individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.
With the Save markers in lat/lon format when the floorplan uses UTM coordinates option you
can select to save markers in GPS (lat/lon) WGS84 format when the iBwave map file has UTM
coordinates. The coordinate system used is saved to the marker file. In playback mode, the
coordinate system is detected when loading marker files so that both WGS84 and UTM format
marker files are displayed correctly.

212
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.16.8.35 MapXtreme Properties dialog

Click the 2 Properties button to define some MapXtreme specific properties. Note that these
settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset
file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open
Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapXtreme Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the
table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers
are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position
layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a
bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area
(e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened
where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with
the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By selecting and clearing the
Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers
from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove button.

6.17 Measurement and scanning profiles

To make the measurement configuration for different devices more convenient, you can create
measurement profiles for phones and scanning profiles for scanners. A measurement profile
contains all the necessary settings for making data transfers, voice/video calls, sending
messages, etc. and a scanning profile contains the frequencies to be scanned and so on. The
measurement and scanning profiles can also be exported to another Nemo Outdoor system. See
chapter Export/import settings for more information on exporting settings. You can also make
duplicates of an existing measurement profile.

6.17.1 Measurement profiles

To select a measurement profile for a device, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button
next to a service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select a profile from the list. Select None if you
wish to remove a profile from a device.
To create a new measurement profile, you first need to deselect a measurement profile if you
have already selected one. Go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next to a service
(e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select None. Now define the settings you wish to save as a new

213
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

measurement profile and finally go back to the Devices view, click the arrow button next to a
service, and select Save as New Measurement Profile.

To edit an existing measurement profile, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next
to a service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select Edit Measurement Profiles.

214
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Measurement Profiles dialog, double-click the measurement profile you wish to edit and
make the necessary changes. You can also copy an existing measurement profile and edit it to
make a new profile.

215
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.17.2 Scanning profiles

Please note that you need to have a scanner connected to the system and Nemo
Outdoor in online mode before you can configure and use scanning profiles.

To select a scanning profile for a scanner, click the Measurement Control button and select a
scanning profile from the bottom of the menu.

To create a new scanning profile, click the Measurement Control button and select Scanning
Profiles.

The Measurement Profiles dialog is opened.Click the Add button to define a new scanning
profile.

216
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Measurement Properties dialog is opened. Enter the required information and click OK. The
scanning profile is added to the Measurement Profiles dialog.

The saved scanning profile is also added to the Measurement Control menu from where it can be
selected for a scanner.

6.18 IP packet capturing

With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and
can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. A separate log file is
generated for each test terminal making data transfers.
In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor:
1. First, install Microsoft Network Monitor. Go to Microsoft website to download the free
Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM34_x86.exe (for 32-bit Windows) or
NM34_x64.exe (for 64-bit Windows) installation file and click on Download.
2. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network
Monitor 3.4 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation and follow the steps in the
installation wizard to finish the installation.
3. Next, install Nemo Outdoor.

217
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. Restart Nemo Outdoor after you have installed M34_x86.exe.

5. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties,
Measurement page. Select the Enable IP Capture option.

Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is
not installed.

IP packet capture measurement option has several states:

• Disabled: IP packet monitoring is not performed at all
• No logging: a separate .pcap file is not written but, for example, KPI, IP service access
time is recorded
• Partial logging: only message headers are recorded
• Full logging: all messages are recorded
The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP
capturing is enabled.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging in the Enable IP Capture
field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany
the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information
in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

218
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.19 Making script files

Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners.

The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension
for script files is .nsfx or .nsf (old script format). You can edit the Script file configuration in the
Script Editor dialog. When editing scripts, it is possible to have several Script Editor dialogs open
and to copy and paste commands from one script to another.

You can access this dialog by selecting Measurement | Script Editor (Ctrl+E). Click Open and
select one of the example scripts.

The Script view at the top shows a list of all functions and parameters in the current script. The
same functions are displayed in a graphical format in the Visualizer view. If you select an item in
either view, the corresponding item will be selected in both views. Double-click an item to edit
the settings.

Drag and drop commands to the Script view from the menu on the right. Selecting an item may
open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for
more detailed information on the dialogs. You can rearrange the script items by drag and drop.

Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.
Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the
measurements. The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000.
When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have
been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For
example, if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties – Configuration
dialog, that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties
dialog does not appear.
New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values.

219
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed.
Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for
inserting the file name.
Close exits the dialog.

Notes about script functions:

Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the
IF loop.
Examples of conditions:
• “Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm
 Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered
• “Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed
 Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered.
The reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the
measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF
condition is triggered. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is
different from the previous value. For example,
 Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm  triggers the IF string
 Carrier RSSI value -70dBm  nothing happens
 Carrier RSSI value -68dBm  Triggers the IF string

6.19.1 Script transfer stop commands

With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. You can change
the status (normal or forced) of a script command, such as voice call or data transfer, by double-
clicking the end command.

For example, a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting
for its completion. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is
not completed during a user-defined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data
transfer automatically. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as
Normal data disconnect.
The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or
wait commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from
GSM to UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the
system changes. In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is
GSM. Call duration is set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set
with line three, Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the
script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is
ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to
UMTS; whichever comes first.

220
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Figure 4. GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system
changes to UMTS.

221
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.19.2 Receive call

In the Incoming Call Configuration dialog you can define settings for incoming calls.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started
from the channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note
that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay
Between Call Attempts parameter.
Call reception timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call reception attempt. If
the value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call reception
attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call
Reception Timeout value is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10
seconds.
Select the Enable Nemo Server connection option to enable incoming calls from Nemo Server.
Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define connection
settings.
Network interface defines the network interface used in E2E requests.
Own number defines the device’s phone number.
Server line defines the Nemo Server phone number.
Select the Enable Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz

222
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With
the Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample
length a maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples:
10s.wav, 4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received
audio sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a
prefix is defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where
prefix is the user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal
precision but without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format.
For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default
threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the
Script Editor.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the
delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least
10 seconds.

223
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.19.3 Wait settings

To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different
conditions for the wait. You can also define custom conditions.

With the Wait Fixed time and Random time options you can define a fixed wait time (in ms) or a
random time (define the minimum and maximum values in ms) and then select one of the
following:
• Current time: wait (fixed or random) is added between items in the script.
• Last notification: wait (fixed or random) is added after the selected notification. Select
the notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script pause
for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing
before the call attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made notifications can be
selected here.

With the Until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues.

With the For all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points
inside the script file. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the
script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization methods
can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user.
In the example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP download
simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. Wait

224
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings
dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”.

Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be
synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many
synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the
number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be
equal.

The Time synchronization point command provides accurate time synchronization on both A-
and B-sides with multiple devices should be used when a certain command must be executed
exactly after an elapsed time (t=0) with more than one device. Each time the script runs into a
time synchronization point, it checks the elapsed time from the previous time synchronization
point and waits until the wait time condition is met. This way the script engine keeps the original
reference time point of (t=0) regardless of script iteration in order to prevent time from drifting.
For example, the end-to-end voice call script commands below are repeated three times:
1. Make call (duration=30 sec)
2. End call
3. Wait (time synchronization point 60 sec)
4. Receive call (timeout=45 sec)
5. Wait (time synchronization point 90 sec)
Round #1:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Round #2:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60+90+60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90+60+90) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Round #3:
Time synchronization point #1: Check if (60+90+60+90+60) secs have been elapsed since (t=0)
Time synchronization point #2: Check if (60+90+60+90+60+90) secs have been elapsed since
(t=0)

225
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Figure 5. A-party script file.

226
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Figure 6. B-party script file.

227
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With the Until custom condition is met option you can make the script wait for a custom
condition. Click the Edit Rules button to access the Wait Custom Condition dialog where you can
define a wait condition. For example, you can define a specific parameter value.

Until current system is: script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down
menu is in use.
Until next notification is met: script waits for the selected event notification to appear. Select the
notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script wait until the
system changes from GSM to UMTS.

But at most value is the maximum wait time in ms if the defined notification does not appear.

6.19.4 Advanced script settings

6.19.4.1 Conditional blocks
By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can
define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the
script takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of

228
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

commands within the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will
be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.

Next, add commands to the script and drag and drop them to their appropriate places. In the
following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the
criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands between the If Condition and
End If commands will be performed.

229
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.19.4.2 Loops
You can add loops in the script files. Select Advanced | Loop/End Loop to enter the Loop
Settings dialog.

You can select from the following loop options:

• Repeat the loop x times
• Repeat the loop for x minutes
• Repeat the loop until the time is x
• Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met
With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions
for the loop to take place. Click the + button to define the parameteroperator and value for the
loop. Finally click OK to add the loop in the script. You can drag and drop the commands to their
appropriate places.
In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with
the script.

230
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long
as the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call
stops.

6.19.4.3 Counters and timers

Counters and timers can be used with If and Loop commands as conditions. With a counter you
can define a number of instances and with a timer you can define a certain time in seconds.
In the Script Editor, select Advanced | Counter or Advanced | Start Timer. Define a name for the
counter/timer and click OK. The counter/timer can now be selected as a condition in the If and
Loop Condition Settings dialogs.

Below is an example of a script with both a timer and a counter. On row three there is a loop
command with a counter condition called GSM calls and a timer condition called Duration. The

231
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

loop is configured to repeat a voice call until one of the following conditions is met: number of
calls in a GSM system is five or the loop has been running for 600 seconds.

6.19.5 Running scripts

After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.

To run the script file:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field.
Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be
different for each device.
2. Click the Start Script button. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement
according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts
Automatically option in the User Interface Properties – General dialog, Nemo Outdoor
will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button.
3. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.
4. During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device
individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device
and click the Start/stop script state for selected devices button in the Devices view. You
can then control the device manually.
5. You can monitor the script status in the Script status view.

6. After the script is finished, you can stop the recording by clicking the Stop button in the
Home tab.

232
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.20 Call sequences

The sequence-based end-to-end call synchronization method between Nemo Outdoor and
Nemo Server provides perfect call statistics at both ends, field unit and Nemo Server, regardless
of call connection success and even in difficult cellular environments, such as out of coverage. By
utilizing timing and pre-determined test sequences, a data connection is not required during the
measurements. However, a data connection provides optional time synchronization to
compensate clock drifts and to abort test sequence if needed. Each channel (field test
terminal/landline couple) generates one file on A-side and one file on B-side. A and B files have
the same name with the « B_ » distinction and a unique call ID is written to each call session at
both ends.

The feature requires Nemo Server version 5.x or higher.

Go to the Settings tab in the Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar and select Call Sequence Server Settings
to define settings for the server connection. Please refer to chapter HTTPS Options for more
information.

After defining the server settings, go to the Settings tab in the Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar and
select Call Sequence Editor.

233
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Call Sequences dialog, click Add to create a new call sequence. Type a name for the call
sequence and start defining the settings.

Call Sequence Settings

• Originated call count defines how many calls will be made from the test terminal to
Nemo Server during a sequence.
• Terminated call count defines how many calls will be received by Nemo Server during a
sequence.
• Repeat count defines how many times the sequence is repeated.
• Call duration defines the length of each call in seconds. The minimum value is 5
seconds.
• Wait between calls defines the wait period between two calls in seconds. The minimum
value is 20 seconds.

Voice Quality Settings

• Select the Enable voice quality option to define voice quality settings,
• Reference sample file defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample
is compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are
of 8KHz sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds
in length.
• Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
• Prefix for received sample files defines a prefix for the received VQ sample. Nemo
Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_device extension mos_date_time.wav where
prefix is the user-defined prefix, device extension the order number of the device, mos
the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal
point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example: VQ
sample_1_34_15112004_143045.wav
• Save samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.
The threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default
threshold value is 5, which means that all samples are saved.

234
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Overall sequence duration field at the bottom of the dialog displays the total duration of all
calls, wait times, and repeats in this sequence. It also includes some extra time to allow for
delays, for example, in the call setup and call teardown.

6.20.1 Running call sequences

After you have created a call sequence, it will be saved and you can select it for terminals and
reuse later.

This feature requires Nemo Server version 5.x or higher. Please refer to the Nemo Server
User Guide for setting up the measurements at the server end.

To run the call sequence:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Script dialog, select the call sequence option and select
a premade call sequence from the menu.

2. Define the phone number of the device that is originating the calls.

If you are running measurements with multiple devices, note that you need to define an
individual phone number for each device even if you are using the same call sequence.

3. Click the Start Script button. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement
according to the call sequence. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts

235
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Automatically option in the User Interface Properties – General dialog, Nemo Outdoor
will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button.
4. The program will now conduct the measurements as defined in the call sequence.
5. During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device
individually while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device
and click the Start/stop script state for selected devices button in the Devices view. You
can then control the device manually.

Please note that if you manually abort a sequence before it is finished, call attempt
statistics will not be accurate. Also note in post-processing that in such cases, the stop
script result will be marked as user abort.

When the measurements are aborted at the field end and then restarted, a new B-file is
opened and the previous one is closed properly.

6. You can monitor the call sequence status in the Script status view.
7. After the call sequence is finished, you can stop the recording by clicking the Stop
button in the Home tab.

236
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.21 Measurement lists

Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining
multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one
after another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement
lists in idle mode.
In Online mode, select Measurement | Measurement List to open the Advanced Measurement
Configuration dialog. Alternatively, you can access this dialog through the Start button.

Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the
measurement list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to
add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list.
Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-
day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the
items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1.
The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.
%a Abbreviated weekday name
%A Full weekday name
%b Abbreviated month name

237
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

%B Full month name

%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)
%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)
%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)
%n Sequence number (1 – )
%N Sequence number (1 – )
%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day
of week (00 – 53)
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day
of week (00 – 53)
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)
%Y Year with century, as decimal number
%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation,
depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone
is unknown
%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation,
depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone
is unknown
Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurement lists are paused
or allowed to run. See chapter Measurement areas for more detailed information on creating
measurement areas.
Measurement start-up defines a certain time when a measurement is started.
Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished.
Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running.
Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a
certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).
Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files
reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).
Select the Save statistics to file option to enable the CSV file writing.
Select the Send measurement results to server option to automatically upload the log files to a
server after running the measurement list.
Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit
the selected script.
Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog.
Start runs the measurement list.
Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default,
measurement list files (*.nmlx) are saved to the Configuration files folder. You can save and load
measurement lists to/from a file or to/from an FTP server.
To save a measurement list on an FTP server, select Save | Save To FTP Server. Click the FTP
Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 356 for more information on the
settings.
Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The measurement list will be saved in this file.

238
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To load a measurement list from an FTP server, select Load | From FTP Server. If you have not
defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are defined, a
list of exported measurement list files will appear. Select a file and click Open.

Creating a measurement list:

1. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.
2. Select a device from the Devices list.
3. Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the
Script Editor button.
4. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.
5. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.
6. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.
7. To save the measurement list, click Save.

6.21.1 Measurement areas

Please note that this feature works only with OpenStreetMap data.

Measurement areas are used to define geographical areas where measurements are paused
(blocked areas) or allowed to run (trigger areas). Blocked areas are represented as red
rectangles or polygons and trigger areas are green rectangles or polygons.
To draw and area on the map, select the correct tool for a trigger area or a blocked area and
draw the points on the map. To finish drawing, double-click the last point. The areas can be
modified with the arrow tool by selecting a point along the edge of the area and clicking on the
new location.
A list of all defined trigger and blocked areas is displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog.
You can remove areas by clicking the X next to the area name.

239
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The pause logic and areas work as follows:

• If only trigger areas are defined, measurement is allowed in the trigger areas and other
areas are considered to be blocked, i.e. measurement is not allowed. In the example
below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas. Otherwise
measurements will be paused.

• If only blocked areas are defined, measurement is not allowed in the blocked areas and
other areas are considered to be trigger areas, i.e. measurement is allowed. In the
example below, measurements will be paused when the test vehicle is in the red areas.
Otherwise measurements will be run normally.

240
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• If blocked and trigger areas overlap, blocked areas outweigh the trigger areas. In the
example below, measurements will be run when the test vehicle is in the green areas.
Otherwise measurements will be paused.

241
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22 Forcing functions

Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor
user interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are
accessible via the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on
the forcing features available for each terminal.
The supported forcing functions with Qualcomm-based UEs vary between different device
models and firmware and depend on the available control interfaces. All forcing functions are not
supported in all devices. The normal method for forcing to take effect requires a full device
restart. A full device reset after forcing enhances the test device’s reliability. All carrier and cell
locks need to have band lock enabled (only bands from the target system may be selected) as
well, otherwise the locks will not hold. It is recommended that band lock is enabled prior to
enabling carrier and cell locks.
Supported forcing features:
• System lock (GSM, WCDMA, LTE, CDMA)
• Band lock (GSM, WCDMA, LTE, CDMA)
• LTE carrier (EARFCN) lock
• LTE cell (EARFCN+PCI) lock
• The LTE cell forcing locks the device to the desired EARFCN and PCI
• When device is in coverage of the locked cell, it also reports neighbor cells, but does
not camp on them
• When device drops out-of-coverage from the locked cell, it does not report any cells
• WCDMA cell (UARFCN+SCR) lock
• The WCDMA cell forcing locks the device to the desired UARFCN and SCR
• In idle state, the active set includes only the locked cell, may report neighbor cells
• When out-of-coverage from the locked cell, may scan for other cells, but never
camps on them
• In Cell DCH state, reports neighbor cells when instructed by the network, but does
not perform handover
• When network sends ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE, the device rejects this with failure cause
”configurationUnsupported”
• During DC-HSDPA data test, the device may use the second carrier, since the DC-
HSDPA function is not disabled. This requires that the UE is in coverage of the locked
cell. When out-of-coverage of the locked cell, the data transfer will drop
• GSM cell (ARFCN) lock
• The GSM cell forcing locks the device to the desired BCCH channel (ARFCN)
• This is only ARFCN lock, so it is possible to camp on other BSICs that use the same
ARFCN
• Frequency reuse cannot be avoided in GSM networks and the denser the network is,
the more ofter the same frequency has to be used
• If a network uses frequency hopping in CONNECTED mode, the device is mandated
to use another frequency as the traffic channel. In this case, the BCCH frequency still
remains as the locked ARFCN
• In IDLE mode, the device only camps on the locked ARFCN and loses the service
when it moves out-of-coverage from that particular ARFCN
• When out-of-coverage of the locked cell, may still decode some SI messages, but
does not camp on any other cells

242
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.1 Channel locking

You can lock test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement
process. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode, you
are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment
if you make a call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the connection
can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. In other
words, the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the
channel.
Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays
only Serving Cell values.

To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:

1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Channel Locking.

243
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

2. The table displays a list of channels that are currently visible to the device. Click the
Refresh button to update the list.

3. Select the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits
(it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. You can
also select a channel from the table. The button will remain pushed down indicating
that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view
when a lock is activated.

4. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing Functions | Channel Locking dialog to release the
channel lock or select a new channel.

244
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.2 Band locking

With the band locking functionality you can compare how the network functions with different
bands and systems. With the band lock functionality you can force the mobile to use certain
bands or system(s).
When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Band Locking.

Choose the band(s) or system(s) from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile
to the band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog.
A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the
band lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.

245
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.3 Network selection

With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to manually register and deregister to and from a mobile
network. Click the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view and select Network
Selection.

The Register, Deregister, and Scan functions are available only when the device is in detached
mode.
Select Manual, type in a PLMN ID, and click Register to register to a specific network. If you
select Automatic, the device will automatically select the network.
Note that if the device is registered to a network, it is recommended to deregister the
device before registering to another network. Especially when switching between
operators. Also note that all NMR devices have mobile data enabled and the devices are
attached to a network so they need to be deregistered.
Click the Scan button to scan for available networks. Note that the scanning may take several
minutes and it cannot be canceled. Select a network from the list by double-clicking the network
name and click Register. From the Device Status view you can observe the status of the device.
To switch back to Automatic mode, select Automatic and click Register.

246
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.4 Carrier aggregation forcing

You can disable and enable LTE-A carrier aggregation with certain Samsung Shannon chipset-
based devices. When LTE-A carrier aggregation is disabled, the device does not register
secondary cells.
1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Carrier Aggregation.

2. Click the Enable/Disable Carrier Aggregation to activate and deactivate the forcing
feature.

247
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.5 Handover control

Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the
mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell.
Start a measurement and make a call. Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings
| Handover Control). Define the channel and handover type and click OK.

The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force
the handover to.
The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.
The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover
suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the corresponding button
will indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also possible to send the same
command several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing
command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a
different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to
scrambling code 6. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the user can set a new
target cell and press the Handover forcing button again.
The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets,
i.e. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP)

248
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers
normally.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is
GSM or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings
are disabled. In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA,
band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.

Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode
can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by
biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore, it is also possible to bias

249
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

the current active cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one
scrambling code. By pressing the Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0
and RSCP values as set by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the
terminal reports unbiased values.

In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the
terminal active set includes scrambling code 7 with Ec/N0 value -3.3dB shown as a brown curve.
Scrambling code 5 and 6 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling
code 6 is selected to be a target cell.

Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is active with Ec/N0 value -4.5dB.
Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 7 is seen
with Ec/N0 value -14.0dB (brown) and scrambling code 5 (green) is seen with Ec/N0 value -
23.7dB.

250
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement
reports to the network with biased values.

Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.

When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers
to other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/
measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use

251
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

this feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place
when driving away from a base station.

Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to
another. See chapter Making script files.

252
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.6 Cell barring

During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all
end users (Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells
(Reverse).
The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices
view and choosing Cell Barring.

6.22.7 Set terminal radio on/off (airplane mode)

It is possible to set the terminal radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the
Measurement settings button in the Devices view and selecting Set Terminal Radio On/Off.
The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the terminal radio is off.

6.22.8 AMR codec forcing

This feature is available with Qualcomm-based devices.

253
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

It is possible to force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is
forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to
23.85 kbps.
The codecs are enabled/disabled from the Measurement Properties – Measurement page.

6.22.9 Qualcomm NV item read and write

This feature is only available with Qualcomm-based devices.

Note that this is an advanced feature: modifying item value could cause serious harm to
the test device.

The following forcing features are Qualcomm chipset specific, and the user needs to know their
specifications in terms to use them. For further reference, see Qualcomm’s QDXM (Qualcomm
eXtensible Diagnostic Monitor). The available forcing functions are: RRC version forcing, HSDPA
UE category, HSPA UE category, WCDMA RRC settings.
To open EFS/NV item configuration go to Measurement settings and select EFS/NV Item
Configuration.
Read function allows users to read item data.
To use the Write function, users must first select Accept, and agree to use the function at their
own risk.

Digital offline mode allows switching to digital offline mode.

Reboot device reboots the device.

254
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.22.10 eDRX and PSM setting configuration with LTE-M and NB-IoT devices
From the Devices view - UE Settings you will find controls for defining eDRX and PSM settings
for LTE-M (NB-S1 mode eDRX cycle) and NB-IoT (NB-S1 mode eDRX cycle).

Select a value from the dropdown menu and click Apply.

The Device Status view will display the selected settings.

255
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can view eDRX and PSM related events in a grid.

6.23 Cell testing

The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are
locked to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking
the Measurement settings button in the Devices view
and choosing Cell Testing. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing. After
defining all the test settings, click Start Testing.

Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the
call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the
cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list
may remain empty.
Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by
selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test starts with a

256
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

voice connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP
context with the cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For
example, if Voice call is selected, no Packet call settings are displayed
RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value
defined here will be included in the test
Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this
value will be included in the test
Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made during the test.
Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell
if no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor
continues to the next cell or to packet call testing
Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the
packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell.
After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell
Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file
Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.
The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful
attempts, and the number the number of attempts.

6.24 RF validation
In order to prevent measurements with faulty antenna and RF cables, users can perform RF
cross-checking with the test devices connected to Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Invex. This can be
done using the RF offset parameter, RF test feature, level check, or scanner configuration
check.

257
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.24.1 RF test
With the RF test feature, users can validate all test devices before starting measurements. The
RF test gives detailed information about the RF performance of the connected test devices, UEs
and scanners.
RF test can be activated when more than one test device is connected to Nemo Outdoor. Select
RF Test from the Measurement Settings menu of a device.

258
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the RF Test dialog, select the test devices to be validated. By default all devices are selected.

Select the Stop test manually option or define the Test duration in minutes.
Define the Alarm limits for the various parameters. A 3dB value is used by default.
Click Start to run the RF test. The test will be stopped either manually or after the user-defined
time. Manual stopping mode is useful, for example, if RF validation is performed by driving the
test route before the actual measurements.
Average and max average field strength values are calculated during the test for all serving cells
measured. Test results are shown for each test device included in the RF validation. Each test
device reports the serving cell information along the average field strength value for each serving
cell it was camping on during the test. The Max. Avg. value is the maximum average value
reported by one of the test devices measured for a particular cell. The max average value is
compared to average results reported by other devices for the same cell.
When the measurement is stopped, the dialog will display a passed/failed grade for each device.

259
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To see more detailed results from the devices, click the Save Results button. The RF test results
can be stored to a separate .csv file.

260
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.24.2 Scanner and UE level check

With the level check users can compare field strength values measured by a scanner and test
UEs. The data is displayed in a table grid. This helps in detecting possible antenna and cable
defects, but level check does not trigger any warnings. The comparison is done real time during
the measurement and can be viewed also during playback. Custom windows are available for
GSM, UMTS and LTE.
GSM (matching ARFCN)
• RxLev sub of the test UE
• RX level (ref.) measured by scanner
• RX level (delta). Difference between test UE RX level and scanner RX level

UMTS (matching UARFCN and scr. code)

• RSCP of the test UE
• RSCP (ref.) measured by scanner
• RSCP (delta). Difference between UE RSCP and scanner RSCP

LTE (matching EARFCN and scr. code)

• RSCP of the test UE
• RSCP (ref.) measured by scanner
• RSCP (delta). Difference between UE RSCP and scanner RSCP

261
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.24.3 Scanner configuration check

With the scanner configuration check user is notified during a measurement if a scanner is not
configured to scan all the serving cell channels measured by the UEs configured in the system.

6.25 Missing neighbor detection

Real‐time missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both
GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor measurements
are also supported on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which to perform missing
neighbor detection:
• with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection
• a scanner
• a scanner and a mobile
Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A
terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available
cells. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the
neighbor list of the mobile. Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the
neighbor list of the mobile at a given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile
only missing neighbor measurements, the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors
through the missing neighbor detection functionality.

6.25.1 Missing neighbor detection with a mobile

1. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor.
In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button . Select
Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the
Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.

262
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and
Top-N option deselected.

2. Select the channels for scanning in the Select Channels dialog.

3. Click OK and OK.
Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already, and
select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning.

4. Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning
results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports
possible detected missing neighbors.

263
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.25.2 Missing neighbor detection with a scanner/scanner and mobile

You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor
detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM
Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is
not available for CDMA/EVDO.
A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor
list. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the
neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can
observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters,
such as, difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to the missing neighbors.
Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are
measuring the same frequency and channels.
From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. The
field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for
missing neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as
a missing neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.

In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However,
note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection
results.
• Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.
• RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm

264
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New,
click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the
selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).

6.26 Pilot pollution analysis

Available for UMTS, CDMA and EVDO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be
performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a
pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or
there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells
in the network from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT
events, and analysis is always active. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis
via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match.
Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.

The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.

265
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot
pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB.
Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -
12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -
12dB.
RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot
pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm.
RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -
95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -
95dBm
Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the
best active set Ec/N0 value.
Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -
6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from
the best active set Ec/I0 value.
Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within
the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes active
and monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three
pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell.
Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells
that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count
includes active and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more
than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best
cell.

Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button .

6.26.1 UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
”CELLPOLLUTION”.
The event includes the following information:
• Source system
• Source band
• Source channel number
• Pilot pollution scrambling code
• Pilot pollution Ec/N0
• Pilot pollution RSCP
• Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
• Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the
moment.

266
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time, and the results are based on earlier
cell measurement events.

267
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.26.2 UMTS pilot pollution analysis based on scanner measurements

• Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB
• Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

6.26.3 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Mobile phones

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
”CELLPOLLUTION”.
The event includes the following information:
• Source system
• Source band
• Source channel number
• Pilot pollution scrambling code
• Pilot pollution Ec/I0
• Pilot pollution RSCP
• Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)
• Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

268
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based
on earlier cell measurement events.

6.26.4 CDMA/EVDO pilot pollution analysis - Scanners

• Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB
• Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

6.27 GSM interference analysis

In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel
interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or
adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell
used by a terminal. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved
at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I
for adjacent channel interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin
should be much higher. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also
from out of band in some circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection
are:
• Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB
• 200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB
• 400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB
• 600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB
GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and
playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g.
missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM
scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal

269
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

continuously reports RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub
values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used.
In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH
channel. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference
situation. Once triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured
also by a scanning receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode
BSIC information. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning
receiver. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode.
Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test
terminals.
During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed.
C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example,
when AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to
the network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that
all test terminals do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:
• RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I
These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger
interference analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or
BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used.
The user can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values are:
• RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)
• RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4)
• Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)

The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:
• Terminal serving channel number
• or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping
• Cell ID
• RX level sub
• RX quality sub
• C/I if available
For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner
measurements and written to terminal measurement file:
• Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X
• Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)
• Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)
Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a
table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells

270
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

can be seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes predefined custom
windows for GSM interference analysis.

6.28 Band scan

With band scanning all specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology and
the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EVDO PN, WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for every valid
channel of that technology type are reported. Signal strength and signal quality are reported for

271
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted technologies and
bands are unknown. Please note that the supported band scan features are device-specific.
To start a band scan, right click the scanner item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.

Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings.
Please note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown.
Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels
for the parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold
values it takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and WCDMA
2100 bands. The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.

272
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a
text file (.csv). When band scan is executed during a measurement, scanning events and GPS
information are written to the measurement file.

6.29 Timeslot testing

This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.

With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.
Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration
dialog will be opened.

Phone number defines the test call number. This must be a valid number.
Run test until completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested.

Note that if you select the Run test until completed option, the test may continue
indefinitely. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.

The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.
In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.
Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and

273
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the … button to enter the Select Channel
dialog.

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude
them from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green
color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the
number of calls made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the
selected channel and their timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was
accessed during the previous call. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This
happens, for example, if the user stops the testing.

274
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far.
Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.
When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded
from the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.

6.30 Viewing graphs

There are several types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor. There are some premade custom windows of
each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See chapter Custom
windows for opening custom windows. Also premade Workspaces contain relevant data views for
different kinds of data. To open an empty graph, select Data Windows | [graph type] | New.

It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Move your mouse pointer
on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more information about
that particular parameter.

Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press
down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameters view. After
this, right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameters tree and select the graph type in
which you want the parameter to be opened.

275
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.

6.30.1 Graph popup menu

Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of
the graph. Through this menu, you can show/hide various items in the graph view, including the
toolbar and the side panel.

276
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.1.1 Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.
6.30.1.2 Save custom window changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.
6.30.1.3 Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.
The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom
window and define the custom window groups.
6.30.1.4 Save as image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.
6.30.1.5 Move view to
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.
6.30.1.6 Graph Properties
Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph
Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button . Please

277
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

note that the contents of this dialog varies depending on the graph type (line, bar, scatter,
spectrum).

Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above
the bar in the graph.
Value label placement defines whether the value is displayed on top of the bar or on the bar.
Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the
axis changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the
axes. This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.
Automatic bar scale option is available for bar graphs. When the option is set to Yes, the X-scale
automatically scales to the displayed data.
Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter
full screen mode.
6.30.1.7 Edit Parameters
With the Edit Parameters tool you can define what parameters are shown in the graph side
panel, in the Values view. This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.

278
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.2 Zoom - Scatter graph

To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot
towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse
from a red dot to a green dot.

279
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.3 Graph side panel – Layers

The Layers side panel displays a list of the current layers in the data view. At the bottom of the
panel you will find tools for hiding and removing individual layers, adding new layers and for
changing the order of the layers.

Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.

6.30.3.1 Grouping layers

The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up/Down and Group Similar
Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be used to group

280
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the
same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.

The Layers side panel displays all parameters added in the graph.

281
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Right-click on the Layers side panel and select Group Similar Layers. The parameters will be
organized into groups based on the parameter unit.

Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group
and drag and drop parameters into the group.

6.30.3.2 New layer

The New Layer command creates a new layer.

Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group.
Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more
detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.

6.30.3.3 New function layer

Function layers can be used to implement sum operations on parameters, such as LTE PDSCH
bit rate for Pcell and Scell. The sum operation is performed for the values of a single source
layer. Select the source layer as the Function source and define the layer properties, such as line
style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more detailed information. Click OK to add the
new layer.

282
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.3.4 Hide layer

The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer.
6.30.3.5 Remove layer
The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer.
6.30.3.6 Layer Properties dialog
Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be
accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit
the selected layer. The contents of the dialog depend on the graph type (line, bar, scatter plot,
etc.).

Line width defines the line thickness in pixels.

283
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Show extended values list displays more detailed information about the parameter.
Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs"
appearance) or one straight line.
Sorting order defines data sorting based on y-value. Data can be sorted based on descending or
ascending order.
Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled.
Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 =
totally transparent).
Float presentation defines the precision for floating point parameters in bar labels. Averaging
refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line.
There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line
and bar graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic
(algorithmic) or fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used (see
chapter Graph layer color configuration).
Window size defines the number of values to be averaged.
Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based
on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen.
Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the
user, so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed.
Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set
to No.
Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic
scale is set to Yes, this is not used
Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic
scale is set to Yes, this is not used.
Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the user-
defined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes
below or above the minimum and maximum values.
Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters:
• Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3
or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used
• Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2
or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is
not used so that it is possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both
• Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or
f3 or…); if the list is empty, no filtering is used
• Top-N: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0,
no filtering is used
• Top-N (Y): Support for best Top-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g.,
only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph
• Bottom-N (Y): This can be done by selecting number of Top-N and select sorting order.
E.g., below bottom three RX levels are shown.
Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar.
The data tip will display information from that point of time.
Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such
parameters are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count.
Such graphs include also the following layer properties.
• Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to
display the instantaneous values in the graph
• Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph
• Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.

284
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.3.7 Layer device selection

The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can be
reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The
Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead
of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.
Right-click a parameter in the Values side panel and select Parameter Device Selection.

285
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.4 Graph side panel – Values and parameter

The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement
defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and
double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.

6.30.5 Graph layer color configuration

Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be
used with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or
parameters, as different colors can be assigned to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID,

286
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

etc. First, add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-
click on a layer in the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.

If you select the Classic option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically based on the device.

If you choose Fixed color, click … to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it
in the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be
colored based on the fixed color you selected.

287
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you select the Algorithm option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically based, for example, on channel and scrambling code.

Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter
and Color set fields.

288
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set
drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set
parameter menu.

289
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set
Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information.

The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.

290
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is
presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC
numbers. All channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC
information are shown with black color.

291
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.

6.30.6 Gauge graphs

Gauge graphs are used to display data throughput. Parameters of all layers’ throughput can be
displayed in gauge graphs. Green colour displays the minimum and maximum throughput, and
red colour the area between 0 and minimum throughput.
The example shows application throughput downlink in gauge graph.

292
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.7 Spectrum graphs

Spectrum graphs are useful for displaying spectrum scanning results.
By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for
certain frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added or removed via
edit marker window.

293
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With the peak value indicator tool you can visualize the peak value of the selected parameter for
each frequency. Open the Layer Properties dialog and select Yes in the Draw peak line field.

The peak value line will be drawn with the selected color. In the image below, the peak line is
drawn in red. To reset the peak line, right-click on the graph and select Reset Peak Lines.

294
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.8 Color grid graphs

Color grid graphs can be used for visualizing data as a two-dimensional color grid where the X-
axis represents time and the Y-axis represents the identifier of the value to be plotted (channel,

295
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

cell, etc.). The Y-axis scale is configurable. Color of the cell in the X/Y position represents the
value. Color grid graphs are especially useful for displaying scanner data.

6.30.9 How to read MIMO parameters in a bar graph

In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the
top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. For example, in the example
below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI
value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify the
used CQI type. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.

If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA
link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last
sample duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample
duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits
and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.

296
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.30.10 Cell filtering in line and bar graph

It is possible to view data filtering in line and bar graphs. An example below shows how cell
filtering can be done for scanner parameters. After selecting the parameter (for example LTE
scanning | RSRP) right-click and select Open in Line / Bar Graph. Under Layers right-click RSRP |
Layer Properties…).

Under Y filters select the button with three dots to select physical layer cell IDs. Confirm
selection by pressing OK.

6.31 Viewing grids

Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement
events, such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3
messages (the selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All
events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed
in a separate window. Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup

297
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

menu select Decode Message. To open several decoded message windows, select Decode
Message in New Window option.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function in Measurement Properties | Measurement before performing data measurements.
Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the
measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when
viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This
requires Microsoft Network Monitor to be installed. Please see chapter IP packet capturing for
more information.
An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data Windows | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one of
the ready-made custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor,
you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to
View dialog. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid
windows to view multiple devices at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can
view several devices simultaneously as separate columns.

You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the
parameter and drag it in the grid.

6.31.1 Find function in signaling grid based on decoded message

You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its
decoded message. Press Ctrl + F in the grid view, select the Search decoded message option
and type the search string in the Search string field. The matching message is highlighted.

298
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.31.2 Grid popup menu

Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.

299
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.31.2.1 Custom Window Properties dialog

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.
6.31.2.2 Save custom window changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.
6.31.2.3 Save as new custom window
With Save As New Custom Window you can save a new custom window. Selecting this item will
open the Custom Window - Properties dialog.
6.31.2.4 Move view to
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.
6.31.2.5 Automatic scrolling
Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement
progresses.
6.31.2.6 Add/remove separator
In Parameters grids you can add empty lines (separators) to make the view easier to read. Select
Remove Separator to delete an empty line from the grid.
6.31.2.7 Open
Open allows you to open the selected parameter or statistic in another view (line graph, table
grid, map, etc.). This item is available only with parameters and statistics grids.
6.31.2.8 Event-based grid color configuration
To make grids more clear, you can color events in a grid based on the event name, event ID, or a
string in the message. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu.
In the Grid Color Configuration dialog define a color set for each event. You can set the text color
and background color. The quickest way to define the color sets is to click the Use Defaults
button.

300
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string.
Here you can also add more events to the color set through Add…

301
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the event in the Text field and select the color
code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.

Click OK. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color corresponds to a
certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.

302
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.31.2.9 Grid color configuration based on decoded message in grids

Messages and Events grids can be colored based on a string in the decoded message. In this
case, you need to create a new color set for the string. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog,
select New in the Text color set field.

303
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Color Set Properties dialog, type a name for the new color set. Select string as the color
set type. Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string that will be colored. Click
OK and return to the grid.

All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be colored with the Decoded
message color set.

304
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.31.2.10 Grid color configuration for parameter grids

Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data Windows | Grid |
New Parameters Grid.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click
Use Defaults to quickly assign colors to the different parameters. If you want to create custom
color sets, select New in the color set field and make the changes in the Color Set Properties
dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information.
Parameters with assigned color sets are colored according to their value.

6.31.2.11 Configure filters/quick filters

Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected
messages will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the
popup menu

305
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.

Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the
Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If
you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all
lines. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select
showing all lines.
You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus button. A conditional row appears
giving you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.

306
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition,
you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the
Other Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu.

The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by
right-clicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu.

307
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row
in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.
You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the
Event (Hide this Event), subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text
(Hide This Message). All messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text
will be hidden. In the same way, you can choose to display messages of the selected type only.
Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules.
When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.
6.31.2.12 Create notification
Select the Create Notification item to create a new notification matching the selected event. For
more information, see chapter Notification Configuration.
6.31.2.13 Decode message
This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages
by double-clicking on the message row.
In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous
Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or
back in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message button to move to the same
message in the messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of
the message decoding grid as text to clipboard.
With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the
contents of the decoded message in three different ways.
The Format as list arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. The Format
as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and
the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the
decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.

6.31.2.14 Decode message in new window

This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

308
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.31.2.15 Automatic decode

The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or
latest message in decoded form.
6.31.2.16 Save - Grid
The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the
Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire
grid window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-
File (see chapter MapInfo Tab-file export for more information) or into a CSV file.
6.31.2.17 Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as
text or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied
on the clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another
application.
6.31.2.18 Find
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match
case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to
decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one.
6.31.2.19 Grid Properties dialog
Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties
dialog is opened.

Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the
grid type and on the measurement device.

309
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

You can select events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. Move
your mouse pointer on top of a parameter/event, and the tooltip will display more information
about that particular parameter/event.
In the Selected tab you can view which parameters/events you have selected and change their
order using the arrow buttons.

310
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.31.2.20 User parameters

The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be
automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window. In the Grid
Properties dialog, click the User Parameters button and then Add in the Layer Parameters dialog.

Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be
decoded.
Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example,
Ordered MS power level.
Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.

311
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the
Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the User
Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.

The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml.
User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more complex
searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to
search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.
It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. See chapter
Export/import settings for more information.

6.32 Viewing maps

Nemo Outdoor supports several types of outdoor maps: Google, MapXtreme, and
OpenStreetMap maps. Most of the functions are the same for all types but there are some
differences.

Nemo Outdoor versions up to 7.90 support MapX and later versions MapExtreme.

Please note that in order to use OpenStreetMap maps, the computer needs to be
connected to the Internet or OpenStreetMap data must be downloaded on the
computer.

Map data caching is not allowed with Google maps so you must zoom and position the
map to the correct location before starting the measurement.

312
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Open a map by selecting Data Windows | Map | [map type]. If you open a new MapXtreme map,
Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the
User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. If you open an OpenStreetMap map, the view will
center on your current location.

Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor
measurements, refer to chapter Viewing indoor maps.

It is possible to view selected parameters on a map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the map. Parameters can also be
opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and
select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the
parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down
menu.

If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle
will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system,
you can define the current location manually with the Set Current Location tool (the button is
activated when recording is started). A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all
location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location.
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map.
You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the
problem areas on a map.
While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip
with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.

313
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.1 Base stations on a map

If you select a BTS file (.nbf or .csv) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed.
A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the
serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window.

Note that the BTS file is displayed only if a device is associated with the BTS file (BTS
Properties – Connected devices).

The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that
the antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the
base station icon to see more information about the BTS.

Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with
“…” In this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.

6.32.1.1 Importing BTS data

Nemo Outdoor supports user-configurable BTS data import. You can import BTS data, for
example in .csv, .html or .nbf format, and specify the column mapping in Nemo Outdoor so that
the data can be opened in Nemo Outdoor. The column mapping settings are saved as a BTS

314
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

template and this template can be used later on to quickly import BTS data from files of similar
format.
To create a new BTS template, go to the Measurement Properties – General page, select the
source data in the BTS file field, and click Create Template File.

The column on the left (Template) shows the column headings in the customer’s own data and
the second column (Nemo) defines what column it corresponds with in the Nemo BTS file format.
You should define at least the mandatory columns: SYSTEM, SITE, CELL, LAT, and LON. All
unmapped columns will be loaded as user-defined columns. Finally save and click OK.

The BTS template file is now saved and it can be used for other files. The saved BTS templates
are available in the BTS Template File Selection dialog which can be accessed from the

315
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Measurement Properties – General page and from the BTS Properties dialog of map and indoor
data views.

6.32.1.2 Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor

It is possible to edit the locations of base station icons directly in Nemo Outdoor. Open a BTS file
on a map. Right-click on a BTS icon and select Move. Then click on the new location and the
BTS icon is moved there. You can also remove BTS sites from the BTS file. The changes are
saved in the BTS file when you exit Nemo Outdoor.

316
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Right-click on a BTS icon and select Edit or right-click on the map and select Base Stations | Add
Site. In the BTS Editor you can edit the site and cell information. You can also add new sites,
cells, and neighbor cells by clicking the Add button.

For sites, you must define the following information: site name, longitude, and latitude.
Under sites you have cells. For cells there are some mandatory and optional settings.

The settings below are mandatory. The available settings depend on the system.
System defines in which cellular system the cell belongs.
Cell name defines a unique name for the cell.
Antenna direction defines the direction of the antenna in degrees.
Channel number defines the channel number.
Cell ID/Cell ID 16-bit defines a unique cell ID for the cell.
Radio network controller ID defines a unique radio network controller ID for the cell.
Scrambling code defines a unique scrambling code for the cell.

317
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The settings below are optional.

Antenna height defines the height of the antenna from the ground in meters.
Antenna tilt defines the angle of the main beam of the antenna relative to the horizontal plane.
Antenna beam width defines the width of the beam in degrees.
Cell range defines the range of the cell in kilometers.
For Cell type the options are undefined, normal, repeater, DAS (for WLAN), and small cell (for
WLAN).
Location area code defines in which location area the cell belongs.
Routing area code defines in which routing area the cell belongs.
UTRAN registration area defines in which UTRAN registration area the cell belongs.
Frequency (for WLAN) defines the cell frequency in MHz.
Service set identifier (for WLAN) defines the SSID, a unique identifier for the cell.
IEEE 802.11 protocol (for WLAN) defines the IEEE 802.11 protocol of the cell.

6.32.2 MapXtreme maps

You can customize the MapXtreme map view using the MapXtreme properties. The customized
settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces
(*.wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapXtreme, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo
Professional using the MapInfo MapXtreme Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with
version 5.x of MapInfo Professional. This file (.gst) can be directly opened by MapXtreme in Nemo
Outdoor.
Each MapInfo® raster map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file When
MapInfo raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file contains
information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to
a particular map. When using vector data for MapInfo®, there are three different files that need
to be in the same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab
files for raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map. If you are
using a large map (size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor
functions. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or
16, or turning the color map to black and white.

318
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.2.1 MapInfo Tab-file export

To export a route plan, create a route plan, right-click on the map and select Route Plan | Save
as MapInfo Tab-File.
The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters or items that can be exported.
Select the items that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer
title for the exported .tab file.

To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and
click the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol
Style dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it.
Finally click OK.

Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.

319
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.3 Route plans

Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement.
You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can
manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during
playback. In addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in
the Waypoints view in the map side panel. You can save a route plan as a route plan file (.gpx),
and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save
them as a custom window for later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to
the color set or Waypoints views.
If you have previously created and saved a route plan, you can open it through the Open Route
Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Route Plan | Open
from the popup menu. The route plan is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel, and
is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the
next.

6.32.3.1 Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints

You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map
toolbar, or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add
button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan
appears in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan for
later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the
map popup menu.

You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next
waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during
a measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle

320
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear
the Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint
items will also be disabled.
The Waypoint detection radius slider indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is
selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is
selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar.
The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next
waypoint from the current position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the
next waypoint. The Distance from previous waypoint field indicates how many meters it is from
the previous waypoint from the current position on the route. With the Next button you can move
from one waypoint to the next.
You can make changes to the route plan using the buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view.

To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a
waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. In addition, the
delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the
selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will
automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first
waypoint on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete
button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map.
Reclick on Select to clear the functionality.
You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific
waypoint on the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected
waypoint on the map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint.
With the Reverse button you can reverse the direction of the route plan.
The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both
be activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive.
When you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.

321
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.3.2 Creating and saving route plans from a measurement

In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a
measurement.
Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map
and select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains
GPS coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon, or select
Route Plan | Create from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map,
the layer list should have a new layer (“Untitled.gpx”), and the control buttons on the Waypoints
view should be enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was
created. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar, or by
selecting it in the map popup menu.
You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom
of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may need to
zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger
circle among all the circles. See chapter Creating and modifying route plans with waypoints for
more information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the waypoints on the
route plan during a measurement.

6.32.3.3 Saving a route plan to a custom window

When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a route plan file
(.gpx). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific
properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom
window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by
right-clicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom
window].

First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side panel
to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the settings in the
Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and select Save As Custom Window in the map
popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. When you open the properties
dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.

6.32.4 Navigation Assistant

The Navigation Assistant feature in Nemo Outdoor provides turn-by-turn navigation for drive testing. The
feature requires a TomTom Bridge device and Nemo Cloud for creating measurement routes. This section
introduces this functionality on the Nemo Outdoor and Navigation Assistant side. For instructions on how
to create routes in Nemo Cloud and assign them to Nemo Outdoor, see the Nemo Cloud User Guide.

Do not configure the navigation device or Navigation Assistant while you are driving for
traffic safety reasons.

322
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

1. Install the latest version of Navigation Assistant to your TomTom Bridge device (refer to chapter
Updating Navigation Assistant software).
2. On the TomTom Bridge device, enable USB Tethering. Select Settings - Wireless & networks,
More.

3. Select Tethering & portable hotspot.

323
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. Select USB tethering.

5. Once USB tethering is enabled, connect the TomTom device with a USB cable to the Nemo
Outdoor laptop.
6. Start the Nemo Navigation Assistant on the TomTom Bridge device.
7. When the Navigation Assistant is started for the first time, the device will ask for permission to
access the device’s location and files. You will need to allow all access to the Navigation
Assistant. Otherwise the feature will not work. Tap Allow and Allow.

324
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8. Tap Permission Settings.

9. Tap Permissions.

325
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

10. Allow access to location and storage.

11. Once the navigation assistant starts, tap the button in the upper left corner and select
Connectivity. Check that Connection type is WiFi. Connection status should display Waiting for
WiFi connection.
12. In Nemo Outdoor, open the Nemo Navigation Assistant view (View | Nemo Navigation Assistant).
13. Click on Connect to navigator. Connection status will change from Disconnected to Idle. In the
TomTom Bridge, the connection status will change to WiFi connected on the Connectivity page.

14. Add the measurement device(s) in Nemo Outdoor and go online.

15. Load a route plan to Nemo Outdoor. You can create the route plan with Nemo Outdoor or Nemo
Cloud. Select a GPX file in the Nemo Outdoor Nemo Navigation Assistant view. Click the … button
next to the Route file field and load a valid GPX file. Click Preview in map window to preview the
file before sending it to the navigator. Click Send to navigator. The route will appear in the
TomTom Bridge device.
16. If you have assigned the Nemo Outdoor unit to a project in Nemo Cloud, the route is transferred
to the navigation device automatically from Nemo Outdoor after the project information is

326
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

downloaded from Nemo Cloud to Nemo Outdoor (see for example chapter Work orders for more
information).
17. Go to the map view of the TomTom Bridge device and select Start Measurement. Nemo Outdoor
starts measuring.
18. When the test drive is finished, select Stop Measurement.

6.32.4.1 Using Navigation Assistant

The Navigation Assistant view has three pages that can be accessed by tapping on the upper
right-hand side of the screen: Map, Work orders, and Connectivity.

The map page displays a map from the navigation device´s navigation system and displays the
route. On the right, you can see the Navigation Assistant widget that displays information about,
for example, the Nemo Outdoor unit connected to the navigation device.

With the jump-to-route button , visible in the selection bar, you can start the measurement
route from a location that is not the starting point of the route. Tap the button to display a slider
that you can use to select the starting point. This functionality is particularly useful when a
measurement route cannot be driven through, for example, because of a roadblock.
The work orders page displays the work orders sent from Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Cloud.
Connectivity page displays the connection status and type of the navigation device.

327
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Tap the Navigation button ( ) on the selection bar to display the Navigation view. The assigned
route is shown on the map and the Nemo Navigation widget displays information regarding the
paired measurement tool and the measurement project assigned for it.

Project information is displayed in the Nemo Navigation Assistant view in the navigation device.
You can start measurements straight from this view. In the example below, the Nemo tool has
been assigned with two work orders, Kastelli and Raksila, from Nemo Cloud, and these two work
orders are displayed on the Nemo Navigation Assistant application.

You can select which work order to activate by tapping the Activate button visible on the right
side of the view. Once you have activated the work order, the route configured to that work order
is displayed on the map. Tapping the jump-to-route icon in the selection bar takes you back
to the navigation view in the navigation device.

Alternatively, go to Nemo Outdoor and select a work order by clicking Activate.

If you are not in the location where the measurement route is set to begin, the navigation device
will first guide you to the start point of the measurement route. Tapping Enable Auto-Start will
automatically start the measurement once you have reached the starting point of the
measurement route. You can also start the measurement manually by tapping Start
Measurement on the Nemo Navigation Assistant widget.

328
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Follow the directions of the navigation device through the route. The start of the route is
indicated with a round icon and end of the route with a flag. When you are at the end-point of
the measurement route, the navigation device informs you that you have reached the end of the
route, and navigation is stopped. The navigation status changes to idle and a button that you can
download the route again is shown. You can stop the measurements by tapping Stop
Measurement on the Nemo Navigation Assistant widget.

When measurements are ready, the field units send the log files for post processing. The
collected data can be directly analyzed with Keysight´s Nemo post-processing tools.

6.32.4.2 Updating Navigation Assistant software

1. First, you need to change the security settings of the TomTom Bridge to allow it to
accept applications from an unknown source. Go to Settings -> Security -> Unknown
sources. Make sure the checkbox next to this is selected.
2. Connect the TomTom Bridge to your computer using the USB cable supplied with your
device, then switch your device on.

Use ONLY the USB cable supplied with your device. Other USB cables may not work.
Also, plug the USB cable directly into a USB port on your computer and not into a USB
hub or USB port on a keyboard or monitor.

Do not use the mount to connect your device to your computer.

3. On your computer, open a file manager program.

4. Your device appears in your computer's files system as TomTom Bridge.
5. Copy Nemo Navigation Assistant APK File from your computer to a folder on your
TomTom device.
6. If your TomTom device does not have a file manager app, go to the Bridge Store and
install an app (e.g. OI File Manager). Go to All Apps and start the OI File Manager app.
7. Find the APK file and tap it. The app will begin installing on your device.

8. Disconnect the device from your computer.

329
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5 Map popup menu

Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
map. Please note that the contents of the menu depend on the map type.

330
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.1 Custom Window - Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select
groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are
available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be
available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE
measurement.
6.32.5.2 Custom window - Save as new custom window
Right-click on a graph window and select Custom Window - Save as New Custom Window from
the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for
the custom window and define the custom window groups.
6.32.5.3 Custom window - Save changes
Use the Custom Window - Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom
window.
6.32.5.4 Save as - CSV file
Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format.
6.32.5.5 Save as - Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.
6.32.5.6 Save as - MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.
6.32.5.7 Save as MapInfo Geoset
Use the Save as MapInfo Geoset command to export the active view into MapInfo Geoset format.
6.32.5.8 Export to Google Earth
By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route,
colors based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth
.kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.
6.32.5.9 Move view to
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.

331
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.10 Open map

By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).
6.32.5.11 Find map at position
When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will
view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have
specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the possibility
to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. Click the Add Layer button to add a
suggested layer on the map.

6.32.5.12 Base stations - Add site

With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter
Editing BTS files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.
6.32.5.13 Base stations - Find cell
With Find Cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter.
Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also search for custom data
entered in the BTS file header and for neighbor cells.

332
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.14 Change view - Previous view, View entire map, and View entire route
With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire
Map command displays the whole map. By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able
to view the whole route on the map.
6.32.5.15 Color legends
The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded
a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color
legends will be shown in separate tabs. See chapter Color Set Editor on how to create and edit
color sets.
6.32.5.16 Route - Add a waypoint to route plan
Activates the Add Waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.
6.32.5.17 Route – Create route plan
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.
6.32.5.18 Route – Open route plan
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.
6.32.5.19 Route – Save route plan
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a route plan file (.gpx) for later use.
6.32.5.20 Route – Save route plan as MapInfo Tab-file
The Save Route Plan as MapInfo Tab-File item will let you save the route plan as a .tab file that
can be opened in MapInfo.
6.32.5.21 Route – Clear route
Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is
activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.
6.32.5.22 Route – Modify route
With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback.
This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix
was lost in a tunnel. Select the tool. The route will be displayed as dots.

333
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct
order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.
When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route
tool. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.
6.32.5.23 Route – Set current location
Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that
this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot
be used during playback.
6.32.5.24 Route – Show current position
Show Current Position tool allows you to show/hide the current position icon on the map.
6.32.5.25 Route – Show route history

If the Route History side panel is not visible, right-click on the map and select Route | Show
Route History. With the Route History tool you can search for measurements recorded within a
specified time frame and plot those measurement routes on a map. This requires that a GPX file
has been created for the measurement. Define the folder from where GPX files will be searched
and define the time frame. After you click the Search button, Nemo Outdoor will search for the
GPX files and display the matching routes on the map.
The search results will also be displayed as layers. Double-click the route history layer to open
the Route History Route Properties dialog where you can edit the route color and thickness.
6.32.5.26 Route – Show waypoints
The Show Waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can
create and save a route plan for later use. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at
least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode.
This functionality is not active during measurement playback. See chapter Creating and
modifying route plans with waypoints for more information.
6.32.5.27 Open StreetMap - Download tiles
With the Download Tiles tool you can download OpenStreetMap data on your computer so you
can use the OpenStreetMap maps even when you are not connected to the Internet.

It is recommended to use this method always with OpenStreetMap maps as

downloading map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.
Alternatively, activate the offline mode (see below).

334
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Zoom levels defines the number of levels from which map data is downloaded. The more levels
you choose the more data is downloaded.
Select the Reload existing tiles option to overwrite existing map data.
Click the Select Area button to the select an area with your mouse from where map data will be
downloaded.

6.32.5.28 Open StreetMap - Empty disk cache

Select the Empty Disk Cache option to delete all downloaded OpenStreetMap data. The tiles
open on the map will not be deleted.

6.32.5.29 Open StreetMap – Offline mode

In offline mode, OpenStreetMap data is not downloaded. Using this method is recommended as
downloading map data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.

6.32.5.30 Layer properties

The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected
in the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the
device-specific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.

335
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.31 Route properties

In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings. With the Reset to default
properties and Use previous properties buttons you can quickly change settings for a route layer.
Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map.
Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting
point of the measurement route.
Line thickness defines the thickness of the route in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. To
define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Indoor Properties dialog.

336
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in
numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background
colors.
Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.
The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the
Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in
pixels.
When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is
paused.
Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn
with the same color.
If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select Yes for Use color set.
First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching
color set in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit Color Set
button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information
on defining color sets.

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the
route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid
values. Therefore, it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

If you are measuring with a scanner, click on Configure Filters to select specific channels,
frequencies, scrambling codes, or beam indexes for which the parameter values are displayed.
To filter spectrum scanning results, define the frequency exactly in the same format as it appears
in the Spectrum graph.
To select scrambling codes, first select a channel by clicking the Select button under Selected
channel numbers. Then select scrambling codes for the selected channel by clicking the Select
button under Selected scrambling codes.

If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select
from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.

337
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For
example, if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route
is not drawn while in GSM.
Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define
the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.
Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS
file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel.
Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the
test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option if you only want to draw a line from active
system cell(s) to the test vehicle.
Select the Draw only to n strongest neighbor cells option to draw a line to a defined maximum
number of strongest neighbors (per system) based on the following parameters:
• GSM: RX Level Sub (if available) or RX Level Full
• UMTS: Ec/N0
• CDMA/EVDO: Ec/Io
• LTE: RSRP
Select the Draw line(s) to detected neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the detected
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that
lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If
missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on
the map. Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid.
Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with
this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output
file and due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is
used with the terminal.
By selecting the Show Textual notes option, you will be able to view textual notes on a
measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the note
in the Text color and Background color fields.

338
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.32 BTS Properties dialog

Double-click a BTS file layer in the Layers side panel to open the BTS Properties dialog. With the
Reset to default properties and Use previous properties buttons you can quickly change settings
for a BTS file layer.

BTS file refers to the BTS file that is used on the map.
BTS template file defines how customer-specific BTS data is imported into Nemo Outdoor.
Please refer to chapter
Importing BTS data for more information.
If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM),
select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the
active system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base
stations are hidden.
Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active
system base stations and for other base stations.
Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base
stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.
Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base
stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.
Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit
existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information on how to edit and create color sets.
With the Show parameter next to cell option you can hide and show a number of parameters,
such as antenna tilt and direction, routing area code and site name, on the map.

339
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell
information and define the Text color and Background color.
Select the Draw cell range option to view the cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell
range transparency in the Cell range transparency.
The Connected devices displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites.
Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.
6.32.5.33 Route Plan Properties dialog
When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer
Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by double-
clicking on the route plan in the map side panel.

Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel.
The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line
attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.
6.32.5.34 Map Properties dialog

In the Map Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on a map. This
value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset,
would overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset
values for individual routes, go to the dialog and define the X and Y offset values.

When opening multiple measurement files for playback in Nemo Outdoor, the GPS source from
the first file is used by default for drawing the measurement route on a map. In the Map
Properties dialog, you can select the GPS source from another measurement file. This is useful if,
for example, the first file does not contain GPS data.

340
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.35 MapXtreme Properties dialog

Click the MapXtreme Properties button to define some MapXtreme specific properties. Note that
these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo
Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click
the Open Map button, select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from
the list.

If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by
clicking the MapXtreme Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the
table shows a list of the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers
are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position
layer is under that, and World map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a
bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area
(e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map, click Add. An Open dialog is opened
where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with
the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By selecting and clearing the
Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers
from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove button.
6.32.5.36 Textual comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on
the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and
select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

341
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.37 Tool

Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.
Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.
Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.
Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.
Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in
and out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons.
Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click
the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the
points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total
distance is displayed in the left-hand panel.

342
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two
points is used as the radius.

To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To
hide the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.
Show Scale Bar displays the scale bar in the window.
6.32.5.38 Auto center
The Auto Center tool pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the
map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is
selected.
6.32.5.39 Auto clear route
The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is
stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect
the tool.

343
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.32.5.40 Show layers list

The Layers side panel displays a list of items available on the map. They can be BTS files,
measurement routes, map layers, route history search results, etc. Double-click an item to
access its Properties dialog. You can hide and display layers by selecting and deselecting the
option next to the layer or click the X button to delete the layer. With the buttons you can add
new layers on the map.
6.32.5.41 Full screen
Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

6.32.6 Color Set Editor

You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties
| Color dialog. With the Color Set Editor you can create color sets to be used in maps and grids.
In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color
sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for a color set by its name. To edit an existing
color set, double-click on the color set.

344
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.

Name and Short name identify the color set.

You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field.
Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, for example, numerical, gradient or
string. The type setting can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.
With the Automatically generate missing values option you can specify colors for some fixed
values while the rest are automatically generated. This option can be used with numerical or
string type of color sets. This is especially useful with parameters with many values (e.g. PNs and
scr. code).
Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.

345
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the
color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for
the value range. Finally click OK.

Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range
dialog, define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by
the same color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the
parameter values.

6.33 Export/import settings

It is possible to export and import various settings, Nemo Server configuration files, and
measurement lists from and to Nemo Outdoor. This function can also be used to send
configurations remotely to Nemo Outdoor from an (S)FTP server.
The Export and Import commands can be found from the Settings tab and from the File menu.

346
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.33.1 Export settings to file

To export settings to a file, click the Export button and select Export Settings To File. Define a
name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.
Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export and click OK.

The selected items are now saved in the .aex file.

6.33.2 Export settings to FTP server

To export settings to an FTP server, click the Export button and select Export Settings To FTP
Server. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.
Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 356 for more
information on the settings.
Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.
The selected items are now saved in the .aex file and exported to the FTP server. The exported
settings can now be downloaded from the FTP server to any Nemo Outdoor unit with access to
the server.

347
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

6.33.3 Import settings from file

To import settings, click the Import button and select Import Settings From File. Select the file
and click Open.
Select the settings you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.

6.33.4 Import settings from FTP server

To import settings from an FTP server, click the Import button and select Import Settings From
FTP Server. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP
server settings are defined, a list of exported setting files will appear.
Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.
Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.

6.33.5 Export/Import configuration files

Configuration files (.ncfb) are settings files for configuring the behavior and appearance of Nemo
Outdoor and they include color sets, color palettes, call sequences, and notifications. You can
export sets of configuration files into .ncfb files.

To export configuration files, click the Export button and select Configuration File(s).
In the Select Configuration Files dialog, define a name for the .ncfb file and select the items that
you want to export. Finally click OK.

348
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When importing configuration files, click the Import button and select Configuration File(s).
Browse for the ncfb file and select the items that you want to import.

Please note that to import a configuration file, you need to restart Nemo Outdoor.

349
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7 Ending Measurements
The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the
main window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.

To end measurements:
1. If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script
file has been executed or interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Script button in the
ribbon.
2. If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated
either by clicking the Stop button in the ribbon. All the ongoing calls will be stopped
and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context will be
deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed.
3. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you
can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of
this file.

When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not
recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select
Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the
measurement is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report
values. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might
indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were.

350
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

7.1 Measurement report

The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays
some statistics from the measurement.
Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The
filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results
folder.
Select the Send measurement results to server option to send the log files to a server. See
chapter Uploading measurement files to server for more information.
If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are
deleted.
• measurement files (.nmf)
• binary files (.nbl)
• packet capture files (.pcap)
• marker files (.mrk)
• indoor map files (.tab and image)

351
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file
name in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button. To
export the measurement, click the Export button (see Exporting measurements).
Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file, click
Save.

Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard, or click on the button on
the dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save
button.

Click the Export button the access the Export Measurements dialog (see Exporting
measurements).
Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze.

Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze installed on the same computer
where Nemo Outdoor is installed.

In the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a
report template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook
or a report, the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo
Analyze. Finally click Export.

352
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8 Measurement Results
This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo
Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server.
The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether
you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The
file name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you
change the file name manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number
refers to the device number.

8.1 Analyzing measurement results

The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example,
with:
• Nemo Outdoor Playback functions
• Nemo Analyze
• Nemo WindCatcher
• Text editor
• Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel
Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Keysight.

8.2 Playing back measurement files

Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files
anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.
When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo
Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor
will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the
playback when you close the playback file(s).
To open files for playback, select File  Open Measurement and select the measurement files.
The Home tab in the ribbon will be updated with the Playback tools.

The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback. There is
also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

353
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.2.1 Viewing and moving markers

You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during
measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu
or click the Play button on the tool bar.
Open a marker grid from Data Windows | New Grid | User Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during
measurements. Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows
will display the same point of time.
Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the
markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move
button. Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude
information is saved in the marker file.

354
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.2.2 Closing playback files

After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved
the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you
would like to load the same device(s).

355
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.3 Uploading measurement files to server

You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor for storage or post-processing when a
measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Note that it
is recommended to stop all measurements before uploading files.
Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select the server type from the bottom left corner
of the dialog and then select the measurement files. Click Next.

The contents of the Send Options dialog depend on the selected server type: FTP, HTTPS, Nemo
Xynergy, Dropbox, or Nemo Cloud.

356
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.3.1 FTP send options

Define the server address, username, and password and the name of the Remote folder, i.e.
folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.
When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer.
You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or via mobile broadband.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

357
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.3.2 HTTPS send options

Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the Remote
folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer.
You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or using mobile broadband.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server. The
URL from which the file can be loaded is displayed for each uploaded file. URLs can be easily
copied and distributed e.g. by email.

358
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

8.3.3 Nemo Xynergy send options

Define the username, password, and URI and click the Refresh button. Nemo Outdoor will
connect with the Nemo Xynergy server. After the connection has been established, you will be
able to define the project type (acceptance, benchmarking, inbuilding, or optimization), and
other parameters, such as market, venue, building, and cluster, depending on the selected
project type. You can also add new clusters and projects.
When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer.
You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
Select the Building ready or Floor ready options to notify Nemo Xynergy when the measurements
for an entire building or a floor are ready, and files uploaded. The options are available only when
inbuilding is selected as the project type.

359
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

With Advanced Options you can define more detailed processing options for the data. The
contents of this dialog depend on the selected project type.

Import Log option. This is to import all the chipset logs into the processed Xynergy Dataset.
These imported chipset messages will show in the layer 3 message window on Xynergy Map
view.
Import Packet Trace option. This is to import the TCP/IP/SIP/RTP (IP Layer 3 information)
messages into the processed Xynergy dataset. These imported messages will show in the layer 3
message window on Xynergy Map view.
Packet Trace Analysis option. This is a mandatory setting to process VoLTE data.
GPS Interpolation option. Interpolate measurements for areas with no actual measurements.
Mostly used for in building purposes.
TEMS Detailed Device List option. Please ignore this. This is a setting for Ascom/TEMS
Processing.
Use Old RRAPI option. Please ignore this. This is a setting for Ascom/TEMS Processing.
Set Iris Time/Add Iris Time option. Please ignore this. This is a setting for Iris view data
processing.

File Options - File Group option. When the option is enabled, you can define a file group for each
uploaded measurement file (device) and the file groups are implemented as subfolders under the
Nemo Xynergy project file during the data upload. Define a subfolder for each measurement file
(device).

Note that file grouping cannot be used simultaneously with the MO-MT processing
option.

360
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

When uploading inbuilding measurements, click Yes in the Do you want to mark building as
ready for reporting? message box when you have uploaded all files from a building and wish to
start running reports for the building.
After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

8.3.4 Dropbox send options

User access token is required for Dropbox testing. Click the Get Access Token button. You will be
redirected to the Dropbox login page. Enter your account information and click Sign In. You will
return to Nemo Outdoor and an access token will appear in the field.

361
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Remote folder defines the name and location of the destination folder that is on the Dropbox
server.
When the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer.
You can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected data
connection, or using mobile broadband.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
After configuring the settings, click Finish. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

8.3.5 Nemo Cloud send options

Before sending files to Nemo Cloud, you will need to define Nemo Cloud settings. Go to the
Nemo Cloud tab in the main view and select Settings.

Please note that this function requires the Nemo Cloud Basic or Nemo Cloud Premium
license option.

Define the Nemo Cloud account settings and click OK.

362
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Now you can send files to Nemo Cloud. Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select
Nemo Cloud from the bottom left corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files.
Click Finish. The files are sent.

8.4 Exporting measurements

With the Export Measurements functionality it is possible to export measurement files from
Nemo File Format to MapInfo or .csv formats. Close all measurements and select File | Export
Measurements. You can also export individual measurements through the Measurement report
dialog when you are ending measurements.

363
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

The Export Measurements dialog is opened.

Template contains a predefined set of parameters and parameter rules for export. To create a
new template, select New in the Template field and type a name for the template. Then select
the parameters that will be exported and define parameter rules. When you export the
parameters, the settings are saved. The saved template will be available in the Template field the
next time you open the Export Measurements dialog.
With the Add Measurement and Add Folder buttons you can add individual measurement files or
entire folders containing measurement files to be exported.
Export format defines the format in which the files are stored. The options are MapInfo TAB file
and CSV file.
Number of values per parameter defines the maximum number of values exported for parameters
that can have multiple values.

364
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Export interval defines at what rate (in seconds or meters) parameter values are sampled from
the measurement data for export. If you select all, all data is exported.
By default, multiple values of the same parameter are exported in a single column. To create a
separate column for each value, select the Separate values to columns option.
Select the Do not export measurement names option to exclude measurement file name from
export.
With the Export files to folder option, the individual files will be saved in a folder. Also define the
Target folder.
With the Export to single file option, the selected files will be stored in a single .tab file.
Click the Select Parameters button to define which parameters will be included in the export.

Select a parameter from the list of available parameters and with the arrow button move it to the
right. The selected parameters will be exported.
You can also make more rules for selecting parameter values for export. Only those parameter
values that meet the rule will be exported. Click the Edit Rules button.

365
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Click the + button to add a new rule. Select a parameter and define the operator and value for
the parameter. You can define as many rules as you wish. Finally click OK.
With the Add Parameter functionality user can export some hidden/custom parameters that are
not available for exporting. Enter the Nemo Outdoor internal parameter name and click OK. The
OK button is activated when a valid parameter name is entered.

When you have selected all parameters to be exported, click OK.

366
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

9 User Interface
The ribbon contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in tabs.

Under the Nemo Outdoor button, you will find more commands.

367
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Under the ? button you will find more useful tools.

Online Help opens this user guide.

Nemo File Format opens the Nemo File Format Specification document.
Nemo Outdoor KPI List opens a list of KPIs supported by Nemo Outdoor.
Shortcut Guide displays a complete list of shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window
can also be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.
License Information displays information about your Nemo Outdoor license, e.g. which options
are enabled and the expiration date.

9.1 View groups

View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs
for easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same
time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you
can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view
group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename
the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename. Enter a name for the view
group and click OK.
To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and
select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears
as another tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps,
and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to
another view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open
measurement windows there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will
be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.
To copy the contents of an existing view group to a new view group, right-click on the view
group label and select Copy to New View Group. Type a name for the new view group and select
the device for which the data is displayed.

368
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

If you need to change the device for which the views in a particular view group are displaying
data, right-click the view group label and select Select Device. Select the device from the list. All
the views in the view group will be updated to display data from the selected device.

9.2 Status bar

The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information
depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a
toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the
corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box
that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is
also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.
In the View tab, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other
objects in the main window.

9.3 Parameters view

The Parameters view offers an easy way to open data views for a certain parameter. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on a graph. Alternatively, right-click on

369
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type (line graph,
vertical bar, map, indoor view, etc.) from the menu.

Parameters can also be opened for several devices at once. First, press down the Ctrl button and
select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the
parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select the graph type from the menu.
Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will
display more information about that particular parameter. The tooltip text can also be copied to
clipboard.
A search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and possible alias
names.

9.4 Customizing the ribbon and quick access toolbar

Nemo Outdoor ribbon bar is fully customizable. To edit the ribbon, right-click on the ribbon and
select Customize Quick Access Toolbar.

370
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

9.5 Nemo Outdoor windows

The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and
events can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for
first-time users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some
essential windows for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their own
custom windows and save them for later use.

9.5.1 Custom windows

Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed
through Data Windows | Custom Windows | Open. The custom windows are grouped under the
corresponding graph and grid types.

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by
technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open
from the table on the right and click Open.
You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would
like to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data Windows |
Custom Windows | Save. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window.
After clicking OK, the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some
custom windows, select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete
button.

371
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

9.5.2 Devices view

The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs.
The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. By

372
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

double-clicking the various items in the view, you can access the related configuration dialogs.
For example, double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.
It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be
applied to all selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices, you
can select the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have selected
multiple devices, you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices.
From the Supported Data Protocols list, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, TCP/UDP, etc.)
used in the measurements.

Description
Measurement control button offers access to
some commands that are supported by the
selected device, such as, start/stop voice call,
start new data transfer, SMS/MMS message
sending.
Measurement settings button offers access to
configuration and properties dialogs. The
selection is device-specific.
Device connection settings button opens the
Device Configuration dialog (see Configuration
Manager - Devices).
Device notification settings button opens the
Measurement Properties - Notifications page
for the selected device.
Device script settings button opens the
Measurement Properties - Script page for the
selected device.
Start/stop script state for selected devices
starts/stops the script.
Group devices button organizes the devices in
the view according to type, measurement
server, or operator.

9.5.3 Device Status view

The Device Status view displays the device status for all connected devices. The green light at
the upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected.

373
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the
devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order
and finally click OK.
You can also define what information is shown in the Device Status View. Right-click the view
and select Configure.

9.5.4 Output window

The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons ( ) next
to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the
speech bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error
message, and the exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View
| Output. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear
Window from the popup menu.

374
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

9.5.5 Script Status window

Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not
available when making scanner measurements.

From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current
measurement.

375
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

10 Troubleshooting
This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.

10.1 Low throughput

In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party
applications, read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based
protocols.
In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party
applications, the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.
For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicates an area of bad
coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)
points to capacity, server or transmission problems.
In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio
(SNR). PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in
the cell, a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application
does not need all the available bandwidth).
Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that
there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the
network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.
High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.
When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be
higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme
Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the
radio link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.
Other things that could help troubleshooting:
• Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some
HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window
size settings in registry.
• Disable IP capturing from Measurement Properties – Measurement page..
• Try another FTP server for comparison.
• Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because
command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods.
For better results, keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network
while making the transfers. Also try different servers.
• For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers
to see if the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.
• For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP
protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

10.1.1 All Windows versions

How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:
Using Wireshark:
Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.
Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

376
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Using Nemo Outdoor:

1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.
2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows
the current value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):

1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.
• TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.
• TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.
• TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-
tuning TCP window.
2. A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is
always needed.
Windows does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size
which is handled by TCP auto-tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is
set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the
registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This
registry entry can be removed.
If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value has
been configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:

1. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.

2. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”

377
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

4. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Right-
click and select Run as administrator.

5. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. This
limits the TCP window size to 64KB.
6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type “netsh interface
tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.
7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:
• disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).
• highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default
value, very conservatively.

378
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

• restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window

beyond its default value.
• normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most
conditions.
• experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios
(not recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for
research purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

10.2 Cannot add devices

If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo
Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see chapter
Licensing for more information.
If the HASP USB key is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is not
on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).

10.3 Required license option missing

If the error message below appears, your copy protection dongle is missing a license option. In
other words, the measurement device supports technologies or features that require additional
license options. For example, if you are measuring with an LTE-A Cat 6 device and you have
purchased the LTE license instead of the LTE-A license, you can use the device with Nemo
Outdoor/Nemo Invex II but the LTE-A parameters will be missing. Please contact Nemo
Technical Support (nemo support@keysight.com) if you wish to purchase the additional license
options.

10.4 Cannot make calls/packet transfers

If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu , check that you have devices
online.

10.5 Measurement file checksum notification

Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the
measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for
playback. The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement

379
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

file where modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The
last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum
information.

#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0"
Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information
and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version
5.50 or later.

10.6 Number of USB devices exceeded

With new laptops an error may occur when six or more USB devices are connected to the laptop.
The current of the USB hub used by the laptop exceeds the max. value per device and the driver
blocks additional devices. This applies especially to the USB 3.0 host controllers based on the
Intel chipset.
The issue can be fixed by uninstalling the Intel USB 3.0 host controller driver.
Note that especially with Lenovo computers, the driver is automatically installed
with system updates. Automated updates should be disabled.

380
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

11 Shortcut Keys
This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be
displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.

381
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

12 Notification Icons
Below are described the default notification icons.

382
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

13 Appendix 1 - Making MapInfo® raster maps

Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into
MapInfo®. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps
you create in MapInfo®. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it
in a map window.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo® can read the
following types of raster images:
• filename.TIF
• filename.GIF
• filename.JPG
• filename.PCX
• filename.BMP
• filename.BIL
Color options are:
• Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.
• Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of
gray.
• Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo®
supports 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend
using gray scale images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better
than with color map images.

13.1 Registering a raster map with MapInfo® SW

If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map
image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image
Registration Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster
image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a
raster map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as
street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point
from a paper map.

To register a raster map:

1. Start the MapInfo® software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format.
Select your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration
Dialog is displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.
2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do
not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.
3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The
Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add
Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the
coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when
specifying west and south coordinates. If you want to register a raster map that does
not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the
Image Registration Dialog. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate
system. For example, if you are registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates in
meters. Using the MapBasic® program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal
degrees format, or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows:
degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees

383
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified
and selected in the map window.
5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The
raster map will be displayed in the map window.
6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor
or Nemo Analyze.
7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

384
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

14 Appendix 2 - CDMA settings and PRL editing in Nemo Outdoor

You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device
Settings .

In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.

You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known SPC
can also be overwritten by this plugin.
Directory number defines a phone number
MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal

385
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

MIN2 defines a three-digit area code

SPC defines the service programming code
IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2

On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously
saved PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from
a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.

On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.
Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded
from CDG.org. The download page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using the search tool
on the main page.

386
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page.

From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when
launched. This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel.

387
Nemo Outdoor User Guide

Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.

Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.

Click Next in the Welcome window.

Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next.
Click Next to confirm installation.
Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog.
Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO. It
should look as follows in Excel:

388
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

15 Technical Support
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our
technical support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemo.support.keysight.com,
call us (local phone numbers can be found in chapter Phone and email support) or send us an
email at nemo.support@keysight.com. Note that for full support you need to have the
Maintenance Agreement.

15.1 Nemo Support Portal

Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and
RMA requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and
submit repair, warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket,
follow the status of existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore, the
Nemo Support Portal includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on
Nemo Products. Submitting a ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical
specialists have all the necessary information available to solve your support case, resulting in
faster response times.
Please go to http://nemo.support.keysight.com to access the portal and click Request access to
obtain a password to the system.

15.2 Phone and email support

During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of
additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full
support. Nemo Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you
can also send us an email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software
Maintenance and Support Agreement.
Please contact us at the following locations (global email address nemo.support@keysight.com):

Global
Tel. +358 50 395 7800

Americas
Tel. +1 469 951 9105

APAC
Tel. +65 9746 2431

P.R. China
Tel. +86 10 6567 8528

India
Tel. +91 982 0016372

389
 Nemo Outdoor User Guide

15.3 Locations for Keysight Technologies

Online assistance: http://www.keysight.com/find/assist

If you do not have access to the Internet, one of these centers can direct you to your nearest
representative:
Should the Declaration of Conformity be required, please contact a Keysight Sales
Representative, or the closest Keysight Sales Office. Alternately, contact Keysight at:
www.keysight.com.

390
This information is subject to change without notice.
© Keysight Technologies 2018
Published in USA, December 10 2018
NTA00000A-90008